Home

LaTeX - Mathematical & Computer Sciences

1. Symbol Script Symbol Script Symbol Script lt leq gt geq equiv E models lt prec succ sim NE perp A preceq succeq simeq mid Ml gt gg asymp 11 1 subset 2 supset N approx bowtie C subseteq supseteq cong C sqsubset J sqsupset z neq smile C sqsubseteq 3 sqsupseteq doteq gt frown Min 3 Wi x propto FE vdash 4 dashv lt lt gt gt Table 13 1 Relation Symbols Symbol Script Symbol Script Symbol Script pm N cap o diamond Voplus T mp U cup A bigtriangleup ominus x times uplus V bigtriangledown otimes div sqcap 4 triangleleft oslash ast LI sqcup gt triangleright odot star V Wee t Mbigcirc o Wedge i dagger e bullet setminus t ddagger cdot 2 wr amalg Table 13 2 Binary Operations Summary As you can begin to see typesetting maths can be tricky at times However because Latex provides so much control you can get professional quality mathematics typeset ting for relatively little effort once you ve had a bit of practice of course It would be possible to keep going and going with maths topics because it seems potentially limitless However with this tutorial you should be able to get along sufficiently NOTES 151 Notes Furthe
2. thesis bib g x of A ba Search Bibliography 3 Action New Edit Delete Preview Search Cite Drawer Keywords BibTeX Gite Key 4 m Title ar cie MarKIey ZUU3TK At tuae Error Kepres s gt Library adaptive kalman rotations qu article i Rotation Vector in Attitude Estimation aerial juaternions article Application of quaternions to computation with rotations attitude eo bayesian estimation e Wertz 1980fk Spacecraft attitude determination and control computer vision context dynamics euler angles Phillips and Hailey 2001 Phillips W F and Hailey C E 2001 Review of attitude representations used E euler axis for aircraft kinematics Journal of Aircraft 38 4 718 737 ces e Schaub et al 1995 Schaub H Tsiotras P and Junkins J L 1995 Principal rotation representations 3 hand held olll of proper NxN orthogonal matrices International Journal of Engineering Science 33 15 2277 2295 7 holonomic e Shoemake 1985 Shoemake K 1985 Animating rotation with quaternion curves In SIGGRAPH mu Proceedings of the 12th annual conference on Computer graphics and interactive techniques pages 245 2 as o New York NY USA ACM Press 7 eo Shoemake 1994 Shoemake K 1994 Quaternions Technical report Department of Computer and
3. Note if more than one character is to be raised or lowered then you must group them using the curly braces and Also if you need to assign both a power and an index to the same entity then that is achieved like this x 2i 3j or x 3j 2i order is not significant 21 T3j Roots Typically for the majority of times you are after the square root which is done easily using the following command sqrt x However this can be generalized to produce a root of any magnitude sqrt n x Vc Latex will automatically ensure that the size of the root notation adjusts to the size of the contents The n is optional and without it will output a square root Also regardless of the size of root you re after e g n 3 you still use the sqrt command See also Tips and Tricks for another look of root BASIC MATHEMATICS PLAIN LATEX 133 Brackets The use of brackets soon becomes important when dealing with anything but the most trivial equations Without them formulas can become ambiguous Also special types of mathematical structures such as matrices typically rely on brackets to enclose them You may recall that you have the 1 symbols at your disposal curly brackets requiring a prefixed backslash Larger structures sometimes require a specified representation This is shown by example 2 frac x 2 y 3 33 Meft Mrac x 2My 3 Wright 2 The first example shows what woul
4. BASIC MATHEMATICS PLAIN LATEX 139 NB you can use more than one command in a sequence to achieve a greater space if necessary So to rectify the current problem Mnt y mathrm d x vee int y mathrm d x ve int y mathrm d x uae The negative space may seem like an odd thing to use however it wouldn t be there if it didn t have some use Take the following example left beginfarray c n end array s rin v right frac n r n r M The matrix like expression for representing binomial coefficients is too padded There is too much space between the brackets and the actual contents within This can easily be corrected by adding a few negative spaces after the left bracket and before the right bracket NINLeft beginfarray c n J end array ri n right Mrac n Hr G r M In any case adding some spaces manually should be avoided whenever possible it makes the source code more complex and it s against the basic principles of a What 140 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS You See is What You Mean approach The best thing to do is to define some commands using all the spaces you want and then when you use your command you don t have to add any other space Later if you change your mind about the length of the horizontal space you can easily change it modifying only the command you defined before Let us use an example you want the d of a dz in
5. less Managing collaborative bibliographies Conclusion a aa 442028 oa vo EVE ee ee ROO poko E RIRs Acknowledgements s s 2x9 o zo c8 ee ee ee References 2 xe aid RO e Ws vU a x cx XOR Y W Wo oe aed Other Methods 2 98793947373 3 9 9603 ee bbw anwar RS ORO UA 32 Tips and Tricks Add the Bibliography to the Table of Contents id est amp exempli gratia ie eg ees Referencing Figures or Equations eee Grouping Figure Equation Numbering by Section New oquare sco eek ea eee EE SS ed A new ont command awe RAR RR OX A d OH Generic header 22599 2B RR heehee woo n kon dda dee Using graphs from gnuplot e s ee Rp rom Sus 33 General Guidelines Project Structure saa xor ES ree Rx ERS mE OR oe AD RR The nlemystyle Sty uoo momo woes Rog G mmm m RR EUR 3 The main document document tex 22222 eA Writing your document 22252522929 309 5 3 P xo wo boc 223 226 226 228 229 229 230 230 231 231 232 233 234 235 235 237 237 237 238 238 239 241 243 246 246 247 247 249 249 250 250 250 251 251 252 253 257 34 Export To Other Formats Convert to PDF 222222224433 Convert to PostScript Convert RIF Conversion to HTML Conversion to image formats 35 Internationalization Arabic script
6. Cyrillie ScFIpU 44 ee Reha Bren 2 2x78 a eee ee ww German s 6 4 49 9844 w4 Greeks soe eee d Hungarian 2 40404 4 be ee es talia sece Pa Pa ee x Geox Korean dde ach oe WR Polish 435 m do 4 44 8 ace eax Portuguese usse een Spanish i nono 4 2 4 awa ea ed 36 Links 37 Authors Included books Wiki usei s Lou 44 o9 A Installation TeX and LaTeX sara eei Editor c 963 Bibliography management Graphics tools oe a a a eee ee en S ealso 24 66 k RR RES B Useful Measurement Macros Length macros Length manipulation macros Samples C Useful Size Commands D Sample LaTeX documents General examples Semantics of Programming Languages E Glossary 261 261 262 263 263 263 265 267 267 267 267 268 269 269 270 270 272 272 272 275 279 279 280 281 281 282 282 283 283 285 285 285 286 286 287 289 289 289 291 F Document Information 301 History 28d stdd 9 9 509 mos ow E ox wok k x ox 4 301 PDF Information amp History ecs e 646 dae XO E v hee ebb eS 301 AUO NEQUE TTC ae aaa ak ah al ae od a wo ded GS 301 G GNU Free Documentation License 303 Chapter 1 Introduction What is TeX TeX pronounced Tech with ch like in the Scottish Loch
7. begin flalign amp left amp amp left amp amp left NN amp left amp amp left amp amp left end flalign it s quite hard to center a formula using flalign but it doesn t matter since you can use all the other environments defined above if you want to Here is a practical example begin flalign 10 2 15 2 amp bWMleft 2xy 243x 2y xyWMight NN amp 5x left 2y 2 3xy y right NN amp Sxy left 2y 3x 1 right end flalign 144 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS 1022 1572y Bry 5 223 4325 ry 5g 2y 3 y y 5ry 2y 3x 1 Several formulas any alignment each with its own label If you want to align your formulas as you want but you want each line to be numbered just use flalign It works exactly like the starred version Here is an example begin flalign 10 2 15 2 5 amp 5 left 2xy72 3x72y xy right NN amp 5x left 2y72 3xy y right amp Sxy left 2y 3x 1 right end flalign 10ry 1572y 5xy 5 227 322y ry 6 2 3 y y 5 2y 1 N eS ww Several formulas any alignment one label for all of them If you want to manage the alignment as you like but you want to be able to reference all the lines just with one number then you have to use split within equation Here is an example begin equation begin split 10 2 15 2 5 a
8. Creating your own style It is also possible to create your own style file The process is similar to the creation of your own package you can call your own style file in the preamble of any docu ment by the command documentclass mystyle The name of the style file is then mystyle cls and can be opened with any text editor At the beginning of this file the following line has to be provided ProvidesClass mystyle again within the style files other files or packages are imported by the requirepackage command Spacing Line Spacing If you want to use larger inter line spacing in a document you can change its value by putting the linespread factor command into the preamble of your document Use linespread 1 3 for one and a half line spacing and linespread 1 6 for double line spacing Normally the lines are not spread so the default line spread factor is 1 Paragraph formatting In LATEX there are two parameters influencing paragraph layout By placing a definition like setlength parindent Opt setlength parskip 1ex plus 0 5ex minus 0 2ex in the preamble of the input file you can change the layout of paragraphs These two commands increase the space between two paragraphs while setting the paragraph indent to zero The plus and minus parts of the length above tell TeX that it can compress and expand the inter paragraph skip by the amount specified if this is necessary to properly fit the paragraph
9. begin lstlisting Start your code block for i maxint to 0 do begin do nothing end Write Case insensitive WritE Pascal keywords end lstlisting end document 172 CHAPTER 17 ALGORITHMS AND PSEUDOCODE Chapter 18 Letters Sometimes the mundane things are the most painful However it doesn t have to be that way because of evolved user friendly templates Thankfully LaTeX allows for very quick letter writing with little hassle The letter class To write letters use the standard document class letter You can write multiple letters in one LaTeX file start each one with begin letter recipient and end with end letter You can leave recipient blank Each letter consists of four parts 1 opening like opening Dear Sir or Madam or opening Dear Kate 2 main body written as usual in LaTeX 3 closing like closing Yours sincerely 4 LaTeX will leave some space after closing for your hand written signature then it will put your name and surname if you have declared them 5 additional elements post scriptum ps carbon copy cc and list of enclosures 1 If you want your name address and telephone number to appear in the letter you have to declare them first with signature address and telephone The output letter will look like this 173 174 CHAPTER 18 LETTERS 21 Bridge Street Smallville Dunwich DU3 4WE April 24 2
10. documentclass 12pt a4paper oneside draft report 23 Packages While writing your document you will probably find that there are some areas where basic LaTeX cannot solve your problem If you want to include graphics colored text or source code from a file into your document you need to enhance the capabilities of LaTeX Such enhancements are called packages Packages are activated with the usepackage options package command where package is the name of the package and options is a list of key words that trigger special features in the package Some packages come with the LaTeX base distribution Others are provided separately Modern TeX distributions come with a large number of packages pre installed If you are working on a Unix system use the command texdoc for accessing package documentation For more information see the Packages section Files You Might Encounter When you work with LaTeX you will soon find yourself in a maze of files with various extensions and probably no clue The following list explains the most common file types you might encounter when working with TeX Big Projects When working on big documents you might want to split the input file into several parts LaTeX has three commands to insert a file into another when building the document The simplest is the input command input filename input inserts the contents of another file named filename tez note that the tex extension
11. renewcommand labelitemi star Itemized list with tightly set items that is with no vertical space between two consecutive items can be created as follows begin fitemize setlength itemsep Ocm setlength parskip Ocm item Item opening the list item Item tightly following end itemize Details of Customizing Lists Note that it is necessary that the renewcommand appears after the begin document instruction so the changes made are taken into account This is needed for both enumerated and itemized lists Inline lists Inline lists are a special case as they require the use of the paralist package which provides the inparaenum environment with an optional formatting specification in square brackets usepackage paralist begin document textbf itshape Inline lists which are sequential in nature just like enumerated lists but are begin inparaenum itshape a upshape item formatted within their paragraph item usually labelled with letters and item usually have the final item prefixed with and or or end inparaenum like this example 114 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING Inline lists which are sequential in nature just like enumerated lists but are a formatted within their paragraph b usually labelled with letters and c usually have the final item prefixed with and or or like this example Footnotes Footnotes are a very useful way of providing extra infor
12. 3 kinematics Information Science University of Pennsylvania Philadelphia PA 19104 multisensor observability perturbation analysis quaternions reference frames rotation composition 1 rotation matrices rotations m pa 18 publications in group quaternions of 38 4 Figure 7 5 BibDesk e cb2Bib The cb2Bib is a tool for rapidly extracting unformatted or unstandard ized biblographic references from email alerts journal Web pages and PDF files e KBibTeX KBibTeX is a BibTeX editor for KDE to edit bibliographies used with LaTeX Features include comfortable input masks starting web queries e g Google or PubMed and exporting to PDF PostScript RTF and XML HTML As KBibTeX is using KDE s KParts technology KBibTeX can be embedded into Kile or Konqueror e Dibwiki Bibwiki is a Specialpage for MediaWiki to manage BibTeX bibliogra phies It offers a straightforward way to import and export bibliographic records e BibDesk BibDesk is a bibliographic reference manager for Mac OS X It features a very usable user interface and provides a number of features like smart folders based on keywords and live tex display e CiteULike CiteULike is a free online service to organise academic papers It can export citations in BibTeX format and can scrape BibTeX data from many popular websites e Dibtex Bibtex is a DokuWiki plugin that allows for the i
13. A Typical Command Line Session LaTeX itself does not have a GUI graphical user interface since it is just a program that crunches away at your input files and produces either a DVI or PDF file Some LaTeX installations feature a graphical front end where you can click LaTeX into compiling your input file On other systems there might be some typing involved so here is how to coax LaTeX into compiling your input file on a text based system Please note this description assumes that a working LaTeX installation already sits on your computer 1 Edit Create your LaTeX input file This file must be plain ASCII text On Unix all the editors will create just that On Windows you might want to make sure that you save the file in ASCII or Plain Text format When picking a name for your file make sure it bears a tex extension 2 Run LaTeX on your input file If successful you will end up with a dvi file It may be necessary to run LaTeX several times to get the table of contents and all internal references right When your input file has a bug LaTeX will tell you about it and stop processing your input file Type ctrl D to get back to the command line latex foo tex Now you may view the DVI file On Unix with X11 you can type xdvi foo dvi on Windows you can use a program called yap yet another previewer You can run a similar procedure with pdflatex to produce a PDF document from the original tex source Similar to above type the comman
14. Phew What a busy tutorial A lot of material was covered here mainly because formatting is such a broad topic Latex is so flexible that we actually only skimmed SUMMARY 115 renewcommand thefootnote arabic footnote Arabic numerals e g 1 2 3 renewcommand thefootnote roman footnote Roman numerals lowercase eg i ii iii renewcommand thefootnote Roman footnote Roman numerals upper case e g I II III renewcommand thefootnote alph footnote Alphabetic lowercase e g a b c renewcommand thefootnote Alph footnote Alphabetic uppercase e g A B C renewcommand thefootnote fnsymbol footnote A sequence of nine symbols try it and see the surface as you can have much more control over the presentation of your document if you wish Having said that one of the purposes of Latex is to take away the stress of having to deal with the physical presentation yourself so you need not get too carried away 116 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING Chapter 12 Page Layout Latex and the document class will normally take care of page layout issues for you For submission to an academic publication this entire topic will be out of your hands as the publishers want to control the presentation However for your own documents there are some obvious settings that you may wish to change margins page orientation and columns
15. The algorithm environment 222 2x94 Pug e m Ren de ess An example from the manual Code formating using the Listings 18 Letters The letter class 23320 bee he oe ddd Gb ck Eu ede Envelopes s 2 4444 2B RES Soe ee eee EE Kex ee eee ee SOURCES 5 664 2888 te boh EROR wwe oe eee HEE ee 19 Packages Using an existing package eee Package documentation 644 8464 e bee ue amp a es Packages list Los 5 202 dent Br renis 28 es gy TR TRIER 20 Installing Extra Packages 21 Color package 22 Hyperref package Usage ad oe ha OARS Gu eeu bee RUNE be RE oe ee E E ERU Customization ance dede e be badd baad ae Problems with Links s s seos se aca RE 4 9 Problems with Bookmarks a p IRR RUE Problems with tables and figures 23 Listings package 24 Rotating package 25 Beamer package make your presentations in LaTeX 26 Xy Pic package create diagrams A simple diagram UR RR me e ep dc SSS Res References 14244 26 ewe cee EUR E de Rode eis 27 Producing Mathematical Graphics Overview 1 44 amp tee bea tae eed ee Pe sd hee The picture Environment se 245 doa Rob deed ee ee bosco m ee AA EO Eee ee Eee y 4 Alternatives e cox Xd
16. The most important directives for collaborative writing of LaTeX documents with version control systems are summarised in the following box Directives for using LaTeX with version control systems 1 Avoid ineffective modifications 2 Do not change line breaks without good reason Turn off automatic line wrapping of your LaTeX editor Start each new sentence in a new line e Split long sentences into several lines so that each line has at most 80 characters 6 Put only those files under version control that are directly modified by the user T Verify that your code can be compiled flawlessly before committing your modi fications to the repository 8 Use Subversion s diff feature to critically review your modifications before com mitting them to the repository 9 Add a meaningful and descriptive comment when committing your modifications to the repository 10 Use the Subversion client for copying moving or renaming files and folders that are under revision control If the users are willing to let go of the built in diff utility of SVN and use diff tools that are local on their workstations they can put to use such tools that are more tailored to text documents The diff tool that comes with SVN was designed with source code in mind As such it is built to be more useful for files of short lines Other tools such as Compare It allows to conveniently compare text files where each line can span hundreds of
17. Whitespace characters such as blank or tab are treated uniformly as space by LaTeX Several consecutive whitespace characters are treated as one space Whites pace at the start of a line is generally ignored and a single line break is treated as 15 16 CHAPTER 2 ABSOLUTE BEGINNERS whitespace An empty line between two lines of text defines the end of a paragraph Several empty lines are treated the same as one empty line The text below is an example On the left hand side is the text from the input file and on the right hand side is the formatted output It does not matter whether you It does not matter whether you enter one or several spaces after enter one or several spaces word after a word An empty line starts a new para graph An empty line starts a new paragraph Special Characters The following symbols are reserved characters that either have a special meaning under LaTeX or are unavailable in all the fonts If you enter them directly in your text they will normally not print but rather make LaTeX do things you did not intend 7 ke i As you will see these characters can be used in your documents all the same by adding a prefix backslash MENS amp N textbackslash The other symbols and many more can be printed with special commands in math ematical formulae or as accents The backslash character can not be entered by adding another backslash in front of it
18. begin tabularx textwidth 1 X 1 X hline label 1 amp label 2 amp label amp label 4 NN hline 72 CHAPTER 8 TABLES item 1 amp item 2 amp item 3 amp item 4 hline end tabularx The content provided for the boxes is treated as for a p column except that the width is calculated automatically If you use the package array you may also ap ply anytextgreater cmd ortextless cmd command to achieve specific behavior like centering or raggedright arraybackslash as described previously Vertically centered images Inserting images into a table row will align it at the top of the cell By using the array package this problem can be solved Defining a new columntype will keep the image vertically centered newcolumntype S gt centering arraybackslash m 4 linewidth Professional tables Many tables in professionally typeset books and journals feature simple tables which have appropriate spacing above and below lines and almost never use vertical rules Many examples of LaTeX tables including this Wikibook showcase the use of ver tical rules using and double rules using hline hline or which are regarded as unnecessary and distracting in a professionally published form The book tabs package is useful for easily providing this professionalism in LaTeX tables and the documentation also provides guidelines on what constitutes a good table In brief the package uses to
19. but slightly different than italics textsc scshape SMALL CAPITALS textbf bfseries bold textmd mdseries medium weight a font weight in between normal and bold You may have noticed the absence of underline Although this is available via the underline command text underlined in this way will not break properly This functionality has to be added with the ulem package Stick usepackage ulem in your preamble By default this overrides the emph command with the underline rather than the italic style It is unlikely that you wish this to be the desired effect so it is better to stop ulem taking over emph and simply call the underline command as and when it is needed e To disable ulem add normalen straight after the document environment begins 100 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING e To underline use Vuline e To add a wavy underline use uwave e And for a strike out sout Finally there is the issue of size This too is very easy simply follow the commands on this table Output text sample text 3 Foot notesize sample text small sample text normalsize sample text large sample text Large sample text LARGE sample text huge sample text TNA sample text size 10pt default 11pt option 12pt option tiny 5pt 6pt 6pt scriptsize 7pt 8pt 8pt footnotesize 8pt 9pt 10pt small 9pt 10pt 11
20. normalsize 10pt 11 12 Marge 12pt 12pt 14pt Large 14pt 14pt 17pt LARGE 17pt 17pt 20pt huge 20pt 20pt 25pt Huge 25pt 25pt 25pt Table 11 1 Absolute Point Sizes in Standard Classes Note that the font size definitions are set by the document style Depending on the document style the actual font size may differ from that listed above And not every document style has unique sizes for all 10 size commands Even if you can easily change the output of your fonts using those commands you re better off not using explicit commands like this because they work in opposition to the basic idea of LaTeX which is to separate the logical and visual markup of your document This means that if you use the same font changing command in several places in order to typeset a special kind of information you should use newcommand to define a logical wrapper command for the font changing command TEXT FORMATTING 101 newcommand oops 1 textbf 1 Do not oops enter this room Do not enter this room it s oc it s occupied by oops machines cupied by machines of unknown of unknown origin and purpose origin and purpose This approach has the advantage that you can decide at some later stage that you want to use some visual representation of danger other than textbf without having to wade through your document identifying all the occurrences of textbf and then figuring out for each one whether it was used f
21. o e a ara a apan a RUM eee SSS SUMET MERC A ee E EE wee ee ee Ee oe eaa a Ree 13 Mathematics Basic Mathematics plain LaTeX a a a a Advanced Mathematics AMS Math package List of Mathematical Symbols sa sessar leen Notes DL Aa Further reading 4 me s RU UE xo External links 52k ele Rex eae eee ed aa OSS 14 Theorems Basic theorems uu 2 32 erie ne at at ot te ana ee erg ae we ea Theorem counters so 22 eh xs a eee ee oh A 444 DOORS a bos a bbe dh bbe aw Dtm bee a ee os Mheorem Styles aa US ie Ow X om mom External Winks s oc ental ee xo See Rh eM 15 Labels and Cross referencing Examples os a sia a dane Eee See AS BAe dudes The varioret package sa 4 9 oS ER RA The hyperref package and autoref The hyperref package and phantomsection 4 75 75 81 83 83 85 117 117 120 121 126 127 127 129 129 140 149 151 151 151 153 153 153 154 154 155 16 Indexing Abbreviation Mist 3 kk EGER M AO REA Multipleindexess s X RN Row Ro mom wow de Roh aia dE 17 Algorithms and Pseudocode Typesetting using the algorithmic
22. this sequence is used for line breaking For introducing a backslash in math mode you can use backslash instead If you want to insert text that might contain several particular symbols such as URIs you can consider using the verb command that will be discussed later in this book LaTeX Commands LaTeX commands are case sensitive and take one of the following two formats e They start with a backslash and then have a name consisting of letters only Command names are terminated by a space a number or any other non letter e They consist of a backslash and exactly one non letter Some commands need a parameter which has to be given between curly braces after the command name Some commands support optional parameters which are added after the command name in square brackets The general syntax is commandname optioni option2 argumenti argument2 THE LATEX SOURCE 17 LaTeX environments Environments in LaTeX have a role that is quite similar to commands but they usually have effect on a wider part of the document Their syntax is begin fenvironmentname text to be influenced end environmentname between the begin and the end you can put other commands and nested environ ments In general environments can accept arguments as well but this feature is not commonly used and so it will be discussed in more advanced parts of the document Anything in LaTeX can be expressed in terms of comman
23. usepackage float This is somewhat equivalent to h What you do with these placement permissions is to list which of the options that you wish to make available to Latex These are simply possibilities and Latex will decide when typesetting your document which of your supplied specifiers it thinks is best Use listoffigures to add a list of the figures in the beginning of the doc ument To change the name used in the caption from Figure to Example use renewcommand figurename Example Tables Although tables have already been covered it was only the internal syntax that was discussed The tabular environment that was used to construct the tables is not a float by default Therefore for tables you wish to float wrap the tabular environment within a table environment like this begin table begin tabular table data end tabular end table lhttp www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib float CAPTIONS 85 You may feel that it is a bit long winded but such distinctions are necessary because you may not want all tables to be treated as a float Use listoftables to add a list of the tables in the beginning of the document Captions It is always good practice to add a caption to any figure or table Fortunately this is very simple in Latex All you need to do is use the caption text command within the float environment Because of how LaTeX deals sensibly with logical struc
24. In plain TeX the only way is to use the array environment but you have to define how many columns you want and how you want them aligned just like a table If you use the environments amsmath introduces you don t have to worry about it anymore LaTeX will take care of it Those environments are begin environment a amp b NN c amp d end environment environment output matrix oy c d matrix c d bmatrix dm c d Bmatrix nod c d vmatrix a c d Vmatrix m c d As you can see the syntax within the environment is just like array Another environment introduced by amsmath that is based on array is the cases environment that you can use to write cases ADVANCED MATHEMATICS u x begin cases 1 amp text if geq 0 NN O amp text if x lt 0 end cases AMS MATH PACKAGE 147 1 0 ifx gt 0 ifz 0 u x Just like before you don t have to take care of definition or alignment of columns LaTeX will do it for you Dots LaTeX gives you several comm ands to insert dots in your formulas This can be particularly useful if you have to type big matrices omitting elements First of all here are the main dots related commands LaTeX provides Code Output Comment dots generic dots to be used in text outside formulas as well It automatically manages whitespaces before and after itself accor
25. LaleX has built in support for citing references However a much more powerful and flexible solution is achieved thanks to an auxiliary tool called BibTeX which comes bundled as standard with LaTeX BibTeX allows you to store all your references in an external flat file database You can then easily link this database to any LaTeX document and cite any reference that is contained within the file This is often more convenient than embedding them at the end of every document you write You can have a centralized store of your bibliography that can be linked to as many documents as you wish write once read many Of course you can split your bibliographies over as many files as you wish so you could have a file of references concerning General Relativity and another about Quantum Mechanics And if you were writing about Quantum Gravity QG which tries to bridge the gap between the inconsistencies of these two theories then you can easily link both to your current document as well another file of references about QG for example It s up to you how you store your references of course Embed system If you are writing only one or two documents and aren t planning on writing more on the same subject for a long time maybe you don t want to waste time creating a database of references you are never going to use In this case you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is embedded within LaTeX LaleX provides a
26. Nthmnotei 3 which would look something like Definition 2 Topology for the following begin definition Topology The note argument which in this case is Topology is always optional but will not appear by default unless you specify it as above in the head spec External links e amsthm documentation 156 CHAPTER 14 THEOREMS Chapter 15 Labels and Cross referencing Another good point of LaTeX is that you can easily reference almost anything that is numbered sections figures formulas and LaTeX will take care of numbering updating it whenever necessary The commands to be used do not depend on what you are referencing and they are label marker you give the object you want to reference a marker you can see it like a name ref marker you can reference the object you have marked before This prints the number that was assigned to the object pageref marker It will print the number of the page where the object is LaleX will calculate the right numbering for the objects in the document the marker you have used to label the object will not be shown anywhere in the document Then LaTeX will replace the string ref marker with the right number that was assigned to the object If you reference a marker that does not exist the compilation of the document will be successful but LaTeX will return a warning LaTeX Warning There were undefined references and it will replace ref unknown marker
27. TABLES Without specifying width for last column A clear day with lots of sunshine However the strong breeze w Cloudy with rain across many northern regions Clear spells ac Rain will still linger for the morning Conditions will improve With width specified Nin Temp Wes Temp 11C A clear day with lots of sunshine However the strong breeze will bring down the temperatures Tuesday Cloudy with rain across many northern regions Clear spells across most of Scotland and Northern Ireland but rain reach ing the far northwest Wednesday 10C 21C Rain will still linger for the morn ing Conditions will improve by early afternoon and continue throughout the evening Note that the first table is cropped The output is wider than the page width Other environments inside tables If you use some LaTeX enviroments inside table cells like verbatim or enumerate begintabular c hline beginverbatim code endverbatim amp description Mline endtabular you might encounter errors similar to LaTeX Error Something s wrong perhaps a missing item To solve this problem change column specifier to paragraph p m or b begin tabular m 5cm c Defining multiple columns It is possible to define many identical columns at once using the num str syntax This is particularly useful when your table has many columns Here is a table with six centered columns flanked by a
28. The command stretch n generates a special rubber space It stretches until all the remaining space on a line is filled up If two hspace stretch n commands are issued on the same line they grow according to the stretch factor x hspace stretch 1 x hspace stretch 3 x ia Vertical Space The space between paragraphs sections subsections etc is determined automatically by IATEX If necessary additional vertical space between two paragraphs can be added with the command vspace length This command should normally be used be tween two empty lines If the space should be preserved at the top or at the bottom of a page use the starred version of the command vspace instead of vspace The stretch command in connection with pagebreak can be used to typeset text on the last line of a page or to center text vertically on a page Additional space between two lines of the same paragraph or within a table is specified with the N length command Chapter 31 Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents Note This Wikibook is based on the article Tools for Collaborative Writing of Scien tific LaTeX Documents by Arne Henningsen that is published in The PracTeX Journal 2007 number 3 http www tug org pracjourn Abstract Collaborative writing of documents requires a strong synchronisation among authors This Wikibook describes a possible way to organise the collaborative preparation of LaTeX documents The presented
29. Tokyo Budapest ldots Ready made strings There are some very simple LaTeX commands for typesetting special text strings Command Example Description today May 31 2006 Current date TeX TEX Your favorite typesetter LaTeX IATEX The Name of the Game LaTeXe IATEX 2e The current incarnation 104 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING Other symbols Latex has lots of symbols at its disposal The majority of them are within the mathe matical domain and later chapters will cover how to get access to them For the more common text symbols use the following commands Command Symbol Command Symbol MS amp M c bs dag ddag f textbackslash t me ge 3k textbar text less textgreater gt textemdash textendash text registered texttrademark text questiondown text exc lamdown i text circled a textsuperscriptia copyright pounds m Not mentioned in above table tilde is used in LaTeX code to produce non breakable space To get printed tilde sign either make it verbatim text or write Of course these are rather boring and it just so happens that for some more inter esting symbols then the Postscript ZipfDingbats font is available thanks to the pifont Hopefully you are beginning to notice now that when you want to use a package you need to add the declaration to your preamble in this instance usepackage pifont Next the command ding number will print th
30. babel at the begin ning of your document and the output of all the commands will be translated properly You can add letters with accents without any particular setting just write a e Ve Vi Vo Vu and you will get 6 NB the symbol changes if the inclina tion of the accent changes Anyway if you do so it could be quite annoying since it s time wasting Moreover if you are using any spell checking program citt is cor rect but citt Va will be seen as a mistake If you add usepackage latin1 inputenc at the beginning of your document LaTeX will include correctly all your accented letters To sum up just add usepackage italian babel usepackage latin1 inputenc at the beginning of your document and you can write in Italian without being worried of translations and fonts If you are writing your document without getting any error then don t worry about anything else If you start getting some unknown errors whenever you use an Italian letter then you have to worry about the encoding of your files As known any LaTeX source is just plain text so you ll have to insert accented letters properly within the text file If you write your document using always the same program on the same computer you should not have any problem If you are writing your document using different programs if could start getting some strange errors from the compiler The reason could be that the accented letters were not i
31. begin tabular 1 1 hline stuff amp stuff hline stuff amp stuff hline end tabular 66 CHAPTER 8 TABLES 111 le 1 1e tuff Etufl stufi 10 1 Etufl stufi pt uflfst ufi 1 10 tuft uff Spanning To complete this tutorial we take a quick look at how to generate slightly more complex tables Unsurprisingly the commands necessary have to be embedded within the table data itself Rows spanning multiple columns The command for this looks like this multicolumn num_cols alignment contents num_cols is the number of subsequent columns to merge alignment is pretty obvious either 1 c or r And contents is simply the actual data you want to be contained within that cell A simple example begin tabular 1 1 hline multicolumn 2 cl Team sheet NN hline GK amp Paul Robinson LB amp Lucus Radebe DC amp Michael Duberry DC amp Dominic Matteo RB amp Didier Domi NN MC amp David Batty NN MC amp Eirik Bakke MC amp Jody Morris FW amp Jamie McMaster ST amp Alan Smith ST amp Mark Viduka hline end tabular THE TABULAR ENVIRONMENT 67 Paul Robinson Lucus Radebe Michael Duberry Dominic Matteo Didier Domi David Batty Eirik Bakke Jody Morris Jamie McMaster Alan Smith Mark Viduka Columns spanning multiple rows The first thing you need to do is add usepackage multirow to the pr
32. cline 2 6 and opt out the first column that contains the text Powers Resize tables The command resizebox width height object can be used with tabular to specify the height and width of a table The following example shows how to resize a table to 8cm width while maintaining the original width height ratio resizebox 8cm begin tabular end tabular Sideways tables Tables can also be put on their side within a document using the rotating package and the sidewaystable environments in place of the table environment NOTE most DVI viewers do not support displaying rotated text Convert your document to a PDF to see the result Most if not all PDF viewers do support rotated text usepackage rotating begin sidewaystable begin tabular end tabular end sidewaystable The table environment captioning etc Although the tabular environment typesets tables brilliantly it doesn t cover all that you need to do with tables For example you might want a caption for your table For this and other reasons you should typically place your tabular environment inside a table environment 70 CHAPTER 8 TABLES begin table h caption Performance at peak F measure begin tabular r r ll cl c lc end tabular end table Why do the two different environments exist Think of it this way The tabular environment is concerned with arranging elements in a tabular grid while the table en
33. e g usepackage pdfpages includepdf pages Document1 pdf includepdf pages Document2 pdf Three simple shell scripts using the pdfpages package are provided in the pdfjam bundle by D Firth They include options for merge several pdf pdfjoin put several pages in one physical sheet pdfnup and rotate pages pdf90 Convert to PostScript from PDF pdf2ps my_file pdf from DVI dvi2ps my_file dvi CONVERT TO RTF 263 Convert to RTF LaTeX can be converted into an RTF file which in turn can be opened by Microsoft Word and OpenOffice org Writer This conversion is done through latex2rtf which can run on any computer platform The program operates by reading the LaTeX source and mimicking the behaviour of the LaTeX program latex2rtf supports most of the standard implementations of LaTeX such as standard formatting some math typesetting inclusion of EPS PNG or JPG graphics and tables As well it has some limited support for packages such as varioref and natbib However many other packages are not supported latex2rtf is simple to use The Windows version has a GUI which is straightforward to use The command line version is offered for all platforms and can be used on an example mypaper tex file latex mypaper bibtex mypaper if you use bibtex latex2rtf mypaper Both latex and if needed bibtex commands need to be run before latex2rtf because the aux and bb1 files are needed to produce the proper
34. ee ae het ada ewes 0 X RO Eee 163 164 165 167 167 169 170 171 173 173 175 177 179 179 180 181 185 189 191 191 192 194 195 196 197 201 203 205 205 205 28 Advanced Topics Using incladeonly i a s ewa ee dada bb P AU BOOKES HO Re we e eee ee V ve deb Ws Rules aid Struts unu Eee ee ee wo hos A a dug d 29 Fonts Usetubexample amp 42 xk Se ho hob b dee Pom a ds XeleX 66 444 DARDS Se RRA A ede de Wed uA vedo S e xeu d V Owe Some useful websites s ew laa dU WU eov 4 y wk OR E WO 30 Customizing LaTeX New commands 0 256 qeu Eae deiode d a New Environments ico 24 cb RS a gad a 9030 3 9 Ro Ro won Extra Space 420 deo eg oe dede ERAGE Ro SES Command line LaTeX eek teeny SERES Creating yonr owit style uo Re Ro Ave b dom d 4 d OPAC DO qs add dorados Oe odes dd Sana Mos 31 Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents Absitacb i444 bo oto conc A PR ROSE ee S4 Few 4 Introd ctiOB ong ewe eus A X EM X ox X ASESOR EC RC XD Interchanging Documents 2 22 x9 haa RoE SE The Version Control System Subversion Hosting LaTeX files in Subversion Subversion really makes the difference
35. raldine Henningsen for comments and suggestions that helped him to improve and clarify this paper Karsten Heymann for many hints and advices regarding LaTeX BibTeX and Subversion and Christian Henning as well as his colleagues for supporting his intention to establish LaTeX and Subversion at their department REFERENCES 247 References 1 Fenn Jiirgen 2006 Managing citations and your bibliography with BibTeX The PracTEX Journal 4 http www tug org pracjourn 2006 4 fenn 2 Markey Nicolas 2005 Tame the BeaST The B to X of BibTeX http www ctan org tex archive info bibtex tamethebeast ttb_en pdf Version 1 3 3 Oren Patashnik Designing BibTeX styles http www ctan org tex archive info biblio bibtex contrib doc btxhak pdf Other Methods As the LaTeX system uses plain text you can use collaborative editors like Gobby In Gobby you can write your documents in collaboration with anyone in real time It is strongly recommended that you use utf8 encoding especially if there are users on multiple operating systems collaborating and a stable network typically wired networks Google Documents also allows real time editing of text files for anyone with a Google account 248 CHAPTER 31 COLLABORATIVE WRITING OF LATEX DOCUMENTS Chapter 32 Tips and Tricks Add the Bibliography to the Table of Contents If you are writing a book or report you ll likely insert your bibliography using something like begin theb
36. see below for de tails on pronunciation is a markup language created by Donald Knuth to typeset documents attractively and consistently It s also a Turing complete programming language in the sense that it supports the if else construct it can calculate the cal culations are performed while compiling the document etc but you would find it very hard to make anything else but typesetting with it The fine control TeX offers makes it very powerful but also difficult and time consuming to use Knuth started writing the TeX typesetting engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital print ing equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the publishing industry at that time especially in the hope that he could reverse the trend of deteriorating typographical quality that he saw affecting his own books and articles TeX as we use it today was released in 1982 with some slight enhancements added in 1989 to better support 8 bit characters and multiple languages TeX is renowned for being extremely stable for running on many different kinds of computers and for being virtually bug free The version number of TeX is converging to 7 and is now at 3 1415926 Its name originates from the Greek word rexvoAo a technologia in English tech nology its first syllable is rey similar to TeX in the Latin alphabet The name of the language is thus upper case rex TEX and the convention has arisen that the name is also its own pronunciation when w
37. with the symbol In math mode subscripting is done using the underscore _ For example the formula for water is written as H 2 0 is the formula for water H320 is the formula for water Note that in math mode text will appear in a font suitable for mathematical vari ables In math mode to generate roman text for example one would use the mathrm command This is mathrm normal romanN and _ mathrm subscript roman text This is normal roman andgupscript roman text Note the use of lt space gt to insert a space in math mode Similarly you can superscript using This is mathrm normal roman and mathrm superscript roman text qsuperscript roman This is normal roman an text Symbols and special characters Dashes and Hyphens LaTeX knows four kinds of dashes a hyphen en dash em dash or a minus sign You can access three of them with different numbers of consecutive dashes The fourth sign is actually not a dash at all it is the mathematical minus sign daughter in law X rated pages 13 67 Hyphen daughter in law X rated 5_ or no En dash 13 67 pages 13 67NN 0 1 and 1 Em dash yes or no NN Minus sign 0 1 and 1 The names for these dashes hyphen en dash em dash and amp minus minus sign They have different purposes inter word page range 1 10 punctuation dash like this TEXT FORMATTING
38. 103 Euro currency symbol When writing about money these days you need the Euro symbol You have several choices If the fonts you are using have a euro symbol and you want to use that one first you have to load the textcomp package in the preamble usepackage textcomp then you can insert the euro symbol with the command texteuro If you want to use the official version of the Euro symbol then you have to use eurosym load it with the official option in the preamble usepackage official eurosym then you can insert it with the euro command Finally if you want a Euro symbol that s matching with the current font style e g bold italics etc but your current font does not provide it you can use the eurosym package again but with a different option usepackage gen eurosym again you can insert the euro symbol with euro Ellipsis A sequence of three dots is known as an ellipsis which is commonly used to indicate omitted text On a typewriter a comma or a period takes the same amount of space as any other letter In book printing these characters occupy only a little space and are set very close to the preceding letter Therefore you cannot enter ellipsis by just typing three dots as the spacing would be wrong Instead there is a special command for these dots It is called ldots Not like this but like this Not like this but like this New York Tokyo Budapest New York
39. 9 to 15 with style extarticle but it might not work properly for the particular font or compiler you are using Make some tests to find the best values for you The Mint hspace 0 8em Mint creates the symbol of a double integral we didn t use the standard iint because we wanted the two integrals closer The Mbigcirc hspace 1 4em creates the circus and moves the integral over it Obviously you don t want to type so much code whenever you need such a symbol so just define the new command oiint newcommand oiint bigcirc hspace 1 4em Mint hspace 8em Mint Put this before the begin document of your document and you can use oiint whenever you want in Math mode Since the last symbol within the definition is an integral you can freely add subscripts and superscripts they will be handled just like on the basic symbol of the integral f according to the settings you are using Generic header As explained in the previous sections a LaTeX source can be used to generate both a DVI and a PDF file For very basic documents the source is the same but if the documents gets more complicated it could be necessary to make some changes USING GRAPHS FROM GNUPLOT 253 in the source so that it will work for a format but it will not for the other For example all that is related to graphics has to be adapted according to the final format As discussed in the section about floating objects even if you should use different pictures accor
40. Aquaculture Settings Eis etal x allocation in haplodiploid cyclical parthenogens with density de 1998 American Natu 2006 04 fa Groups de Araujo and Hagiwara Application of enzyme activity test for the diagnosis of rotifer mass 2001 Bulletin of the 2005 11 93 93 de Araujo et al Effect of unionized ammonia viscosity and protozoan contamination 2001 Hydrobiologia 2005 11 m Entries all de Araujo et al Effect of unionized ammonia viscosity and protozoan contamination 2000 Aquaculture Re 2005 11 Attramadal Water quality and microbial environment a flow through and a recir 2004 2006 08 Baird et al Modelling the interacting effects of nutrient uptake light capture and 2001 Journal of Plan 2005 09 T Ingestion Balchen Thirty years of research on the application of cybernetic methods inf 1999 Modeling Iden 2006 06 T Energetics Balchen Modeling prediction and control of fish behavior 1979 2006 06 Y Modelling Balompapueng et al Resting egg formation of the rotifer textit Brachionus plicatilis 1997 Fisheries Science 2005 12 Ei Salmon Balon The theory of saltatory ontogeny and life history models revisited 1985 Y Modelling Baclan lla and V Daualanmant and amiuntian af mieranartieulata dinte rhewooni 2000 Aauacultura b Rotifer x Required fields E Optional fields E General I Abstract Review BibTe
41. Durand M Durand nombre 1234 56789 1 234 567 89 You will also notice that the layout of lists changes when switching to the French language For more information on what the frenchb option of babel does and how you can customize its behavior run LaTeX on file frenchb dtx and read the produced file frenchb pdf or frenchb dvi German Some hints for those creating German documents with LaTeX you can load German language support with the following command usepackage german babel This enables German hyphenation if you have configured your LaTeX system accordingly There are multiple options for typesetting german language Use german for old or ngerman for the new german orthography It also changes all automatic text into German Eg Chapter becomes Kapitel A set of new commands also becomes available which allows you to write German input files more quickly even when you don t use the inputenc package Check out table 2 5 for inspiration With inputenc all this becomes moot but your text also is locked in a particular encoding world GREEK 269 a s f or glaq 2 or graqq lt or flqq lt gt or frqq gt flq lt frq gt dq Table 35 1 German Special Characters In German books you often find French quotation marks guillemets German typesetters however use them differently A quote in a German book would look li
42. EPS image to PDF and to substitute the name in the graph1 tex file If we are working with a Unix like shell it is simply done using eps2pdf graphi eps sed i s eps pdf g graphi tex With the included tex file we can work as with an ordinary image Instead of calling eps2pdf directly we can also include the epstopdf package that automates the process If we include a graphics now and leave out the file extension epstopdf will automatically transform the eps file to PDF and insert it in the text includegraphics graph1 This way if we choose to output to PS or DVI the EPS version is used and if we output to PDF directly the converted PDF graphics is used Please note that usage of epstopdf requires compiling with latex shell escape Note Emacs AucTex users might want to check out Gnuplot mode 256 CHAPTER 32 TIPS AND TRICKS Chapter 33 General Guidelines During this guide we have seen what it is possible to do and how this can be achieved but the question is I want to write a proper text with LaTeX what to do then where should I start from This is a short step by step guide about how to start a document properly keeping a good high level structure This way it will be very easy to make modifications even when the document is almost finished These are all just suggestions but you might take inspiration from that to create your own document Project structure Create a clear structure of the whole project thi
43. Here are some document classes that can be used with LaTeX article for articles in scientific journals presentations short reports program documentation invitations proc a class for proceedings based on the article class minimal is as small as it can get It only sets a page size and a base font It is mainly used for debugging purposes report for longer reports containing several chapters small books thesis book for real books slides for slides The class uses big sans serif letters memoir for changing sensibly the output of the document It is based on the book class but you can create any kind of document with it http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib memoir memman pdf letter for writing letters Table 3 1 Document Classes 21 22 CHAPTER 3 BASICS The most common options for the standard document classes are listed in following table 10pt 11 12pt Sets the size of the main font in the document If no option is specified 10pt is assumed 4 letterpaper Defines the paper size The default size is letterpaper However many European distributions of TeX now come pre set for A4 not Letter and this is also true of all dis tributions of pdfLaTeX Besides that abpaper b5paper executivepaper and legalpaper can be specified fleqn Typesets displayed formulas left aligned instead of cen tered
44. If the overfull word includes a forward slash such as input output this should be properly typeset as input slash output The use of slash has the same effect as using the character except that it can form the end of a line with the following words appearing at the start of the next line The character is typically used in units such as mm year character which should not be broken over multiple lines Missing package LaTeX Error File paralisy sty not found Type X to quit or RETURN to proceed or enter new name Default extension sty Enter file name When you use the Nusepackage command to request LaTeX to use a certain pack age it will look for a file with the specified name and the filetype sty In this case the user has mistyped the name of the paralist package so it s easy to fix However if you get the name right but the package is not installed on your machine you will need to download and install it before continuing If you don t want to affect the global installation of the machine you can simply download from Internet the necessary sty file and put it in the same folder of the document you are compiling Chapter 6 Title Creation There are several situations where you might want to vary the title from its default format For shorter documents such as basic articles the output of maketitle is often adequate but longer documents such as books and reports ofte
45. Samarin title The LaTeX Companion year 1993 publisher Addison Wesley address Reading Massachusetts This book has three authors and each is separated as described Of course when BibTeX processes and outputs this there will only be an and between the penultimate and last authors but within the bib file it needs the and s so that it can keep track of the individual authors BIBTEX 49 Standard templates Qarticle An article from a magazine or a journal book A published book booklet A bound work without a named publisher or sponsor conference Equal to inproceedings inbook A section of a book incollection A section of a book having its own title inproceedings An article in a conference proceedings manual Technical manual mastersthesis Master thesis misc Template useful for other kinds of publication phdthesis Ph D thesis proceedings The proceedings of a conference techreport Technical report from educational commercial or standardization in stitution unpublished An unpublished article book thesis etc Preserving capital letters In the event that BibTeX has been set to not preserve all capitalization within titles problems can occur especially if you are referring to proper nouns or acronyms To tell BibTeX to keep them use the good ol curly braces around the letter in question or letters if its an acronym and all will be well Or you can put the whole title in
46. Side captions It is sometimes desirable to have a caption appear on the side of a float rather than above or below The sidecap package can be used to place a caption beside a figure or table The following example demonstrates this for a figure by using a SCfigure environment in place of the figure environment SCfigure does not accept the usual figure arguments documentclass article usepackage pdftex graphicx usepackage sidecap begin document begin SCfigure centering includegraphics width 0 55 textwidth Giraff_picture picture filename caption caption text end SCfigure end document CAPTIONS 89 Figurel The giraffe Giraffa camelopardalis is an African even toel ungulate mammal the tallest of all land living an imal species Males can be 4 8 to 5 5 metres tall and weigh up to 1 360 kilograms The record sized bull was 5 87 m tall and weighed approximately 2 000 kg Females are generally slightly shorter and weigh less than the males do Labels and Cross referencing Labels and cross references work fairly similarly to the general case see the Labels and Cross referencing section for more information Warning If you want to label a figure so that you can reference it later you have to add the label after the caption but inside the floating environment If it is declared outside it will give the section number If the label picks up the section or list number instead o
47. They should all be stored in subdirectories of texmf tex latex named after each package To find out what other packages are available and what they do you should use the CTAN search page which includes a link to Graham Williams comprehensive package catalogue A package is a file or collection of files containing extra LaTeX commands and pro gramming which add new styling features or modify those already existing Installed package files all end with sty there may be ancillary files as well When you try to typeset a document which requires a package which is not installed on your system LaTeX will warn you with an error message that it is missing and you can then down load the package and install it using the instructions in the installing extra packages section You can also download updates to packages you already have both the ones that were installed along with your version of LaTeX as well as ones you added There is no limit to the number of packages you can have installed on your computer apart from disk space but there is probably a physical limit to the number that can be used inside any one LaTeX document at the same time although it depends on how big each package is In practice there is no problem in having even a couple of dozen packages active Using an existing package To use a package already installed on your system insert a usepackage command in your document preamble with the package name in curly braces Nusepac
48. Wikibooks version may be found at http en wikibooks org wiki LaTeX PDF Information amp History This PDF was complied by Derbeth from IXTEX book on September 5 2008 based on the 3 September 2008 Wikibooks textbook Source text from Wikibooks was translated to ATEX code using javaLatex program then manually corrected and finally compiled into a PDF document using IATEX system The latest version of the PDF may be found at http en wikibooks org wiki Image LaTeX pdf Authors 3mta3 Abonnema Alejo2083 Arnehe Astrophizz Az1568 Basenga Blacktrumpeter Blob12 Borgg Brendanarnold Bsander Cfailde Collinpark ConditionalZenith Dan Polansky DavidMcKenzie Derbeth Dilaudid Dingar Dmb Dncarley Dporter Drew bie Edudobay Eudoxos Everlong Filip Dominec Flal Fongs Garoth Geminatea Gggg Graemeg Gronau Gyro Copter HenrikMidtiby Herbythyme Hippasus Hjsb Hokiehead Hroobjartr Ilamunknown Icc97 Igjimh IrfanAli JECompton Jacho Ja cobrothstein Jasu Jguk Jld Joaospam Jomegat Jotomicron Jraregris Jtwdog Ke vang Klusinyan Kovianyo Krischik Krishnavedala LaTeX Louabill Louisix Mad skaddie Marozols Marra MartinSpacek Mcld Mhue Mike s bot account Mintz 1 301 302 APPENDIX F DOCUMENT INFORMATION Morelight Mwtoews Neoptolemus Nigels Oomgosh Orderud Paxinum Pdelong Qeny Ramac Raphael Ackermann Rehoot Robert Horning Rogal Rogerbrent Sa balka Schaber Scruss Sigbert Skar
49. a gull Figure 1 Close up of a gull Figure 1 shows a photograph of a gull When a label is declared within a float environment the ref will return the respective fig table number but it must occur after the caption When declared outside it will give the section number See the Floats Figures and Captions section for more about the figure and related environments Fixing wrong labels A label may sometimes pick up the section or list number instead of the figure number In this case put the label inside the caption to ensure correct numbering begin figure begin center includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth gul1 160 CHAPTER 15 LABELS AND CROSS REFERENCING caption Close up of a gull Mabel fig gull end center end figure Issues with links to tables and figures handled by hyperref In case you use the package hyperref to create a PDF the links to tables or figures will point to the caption of the table or figure which is always below the table or figure itself Therefore the table or figure will not be visible it is above the pointer and one has to scroll up in order to see it If you want the link point to the top of the image you can use the package hypcap http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib oberdiek hypcap pdf with Nusepackage a11 hypcap Be sure to call this package after the package hyperref which should otherwise be loaded last Formulas Here is an example showing
50. an arrow over them then add the following line in your mystyle sty newcommand myvec 1 1 and write your vectors inside the new myvec command You can call it as you wish but you d better choose a short name because you will probably write it very often Then if you change your mind and you want your vectors to look differently you just have to change the definition of your myvec Use this approach whenever you can this will save you a lot of time Chapter 34 Export To Other Formats Strictly speaking LaTeX source can be used to directly generate two formats e DVI using latex the first one to be supported e PDF using pdflatex more recent Using other software freely available on Internet you can easily convert DVI and PDF to other document formats In particular you can obtain the PostScript version using software coming within your LaTeX distribution Some LaTeX IDE will give you the possibility to generate the PostScript version directly even if it uses internally a DVI mid step e g LaTeX DVI PS It is also possible to create PDF from DVI and vice versa It doesn t seem logical to create a file with two steps when you can create it straight away but some users might need it because as you remember from the first chapters the format you can generate depends upon the formats of the images you want to include EPS for DVI PNG and JPG for PDF Here you will find sections about different formats w
51. be typeset as such If you want to typeset normal text within a formula normal upright font and normal spacing then you have to enter the text using dedicated commands Symbols Mathematics has lots and lots of symbols If there is one aspect of maths that is difficult in Latex it is trying to remember how to produce them There are of course a set of symbols that can be accessed directly from the keyboard EC lt gt Beyond those listed above distinct commands must be issued in order to display the desired symbols And there are a lot Greek letters set and relations symbols arrows binary operators etc Too many to remember and in fact they would overwhelm this tutorial if I tried to list them all Therefore for a complete reference document see the external link at the bottom of the page BASIC MATHEMATICS PLAIN LATEX 131 Greek letters Greek letters are commonly used in mathematics and they are very easy to type in math mode You just have to type the name of the letter after a backslash if the first letter is lowercase you will get a lowercase Greek letter if the first letter is uppercase and only the first letter then you will get an uppercase letter Note that some uppercase Greek letters look like Latin ones so they are not provided by LaTeX e g uppercase Alpha and Beta are just A and B respectively Theta and Phi are provided in two different versions NE alpha beta Ngamma mu thet
52. characters such as when each line represents a paragraph When using a diff tool that allows convenient views of files with long lines the users can author the TeX files without a strict line breaking policy Managing collaborative bibliographies Writing of scientific articles reports and books requires the citation of all relevant sources BibTeX is an excellent tool for citing references and creating bibliographies Markey 2005 Fenn 2006 Many different BibTeX styles can be found on CTAN http www ctan org and on the LaTeX Bibliography Styles Database http 244 CHAPTER 31 COLLABORATIVE WRITING OF LATEX DOCUMENTS jo irisson free fr bstdatabase Ifno suitable BibTeX style can be found most desired styles can be conveniently assembled with custombib makebst http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib custom bib Furthermore BibTeX style files can be created or modified manually however this action requires knowledge of the unnamed postfix stack language that is used in BibTeX style files Patashnik 1988 At our department we have a common bibliographic data base in the BibTeX format bib file It resides in our common texmf tree see section Hosting LaTeX files in Subversion in the subdirectory bibtex bib see figure 31 1 Hence all users can specify this bibliography by only using the file name without the full path no matter where the user s working copy of the common texmf tree is locate
53. curly braces title The LaTeX Companion A few additional examples Below you will find a few additional examples of bibliography entries The first one covers the case of multiple authors in the Surname Firstname format and the second one deals with the incollection case 50 CHAPTER 7 BIBLIOGRAPHY MANAGEMENT article AbedonHymanThomas2003 author Abedon S T and Hyman P and Thomas year 2003 title Experimental examination of bacteriophage latent period evolution as a response to bacterial availability journal Applied and Environmental Microbiology volume 69 pages 7499 7506 incollection Abedon1994 author Abedon S T title Lysis and the interaction between free phages and infected cells pages 397 405 booktitle Molecular biology of bacteriophage T4 editor Karam Jim D Karam and Drake John W and Kreuzer Kenneth N and Mosig Gisela and Hall Dwight and Eiserling Frederick A and Black Lindsay W and Kutter Elizabeth and Carlson Karin and Miller Eric S and Spicer Eleanor publisher ASM Press Washington DC year 1994 Getting current LaTeX document to use your bib file Actually this is not very difficult At the end of your LaTeX file that is after the content but before end document you need to place the following commands bibliographystyle plain bibliography sample Bibliography styles are files recognized by Bi
54. embed them within the document itself It s simpler but it can be time consuming if you are writing several papers about similar subjects so that you often have to cite the same books 34 CHAPTER 4 DOCUMENT STRUCTURE e you can store them in an external BibTeX file and then link them via a command to your current document and use a Bibtex style to define how they appear This way you can create a small database of the references you might use and simply link them letting LaTeX work for you In order to know how to add the bibliography to your document see the Bibliog raphy Management section Chapter 5 Errors and Warnings LaTeX describes what it s typesetting while it does it and if it encounters something it doesn t understand or can t do it will display a message saying what s wrong It may also display warnings for less serious conditions Don t panic if you see error messages it s very common for beginners to mistype or mis spell commands forget curly braces type a forward slash instead of a backslash or use a special character by mistake Errors are easily spotted and easily corrected in your editor and you can then run LaTeX again to check you have fixed everything Some of the most common errors are described in next sections Error messages The format of an error message is always the same Error messages begin with an exclamation mark at the start of the line and give a description of the error followed by anoth
55. exactly the same Breaks the line at the point of the command and additionally prohibits a page break after the forced line break linebreak number Breaks the line at the point of the command The number you provide as an argument represents the priority of the command in a range from 0 it will be easily ignored to 4 do it anyway LaTeX will try to produce the best line breaks possible meet ing its high standards If it cannot it will decide whether including the linebreak or not according to the priority you have provided newpage Ends the current page and starts a new one pagebreak number Breaks the current page at the point of the command The optional number argument sets the priority in a scale from 0 to 4 nopagebreak number Stops the page being broken at the point of the com mand The optional number argument sets the pri ority in a scale from 0 to 4 clearpage Ends the current page and causes any floats encoun tered in the input but yet to appear to be printed Chapter 13 Mathematics One of the greatest motivating forces for Donald Knuth when he began developing the original TeX system was to create something that allowed simple construction of mathematical formulas whilst looking professional when printed The fact that he succeeded was most probably why TeX and later on LaTeX became so popular within the scientific community Regardless of the history typesetting
56. for example statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front Cover Text and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back Cover Text to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version Only one passage of Front Cover Text and one of Back Cover Text may be added by or through arrangements made by any one entity If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of you may not add another but you may replace the old one on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one 308 APPENDIX G GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE The author s and publisher s of the Document do not by this License give per mission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version 5 COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents unmodified and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers The combined work need only contain one copy of this License a
57. for these tutorials each page has its respective number printed at the bottom even though not a single command has been issued to tell Latex to do it That is because the document class in use has already defined the page style for you Of course you don t need to stick with the defaults if you don t want to There are two commands at your disposal for changing the page style pagestyle style will apply the specified style to the current and all subsequent pages thispagestyle style will only affect the current page The possible styles are empty Both header and footer are clear plain Header is clear but the footer contains the page number headings Header displays page number and other information which the document class deems important e g section headers myheadings Similar to above however is possible to control the infor mation in the header An issue to look out for is that the major sectioning commands part chapter or maketitle specify a thispagestyle plain So if you wish to suppress all 122 CHAPTER 12 PAGE LAYOUT styles by inserting a pagestyle empty at the beginning of your document then the style command at each section will override your initial rule for those pages only To achieve your intended result you will have to follow the offending commands with thispagestyle empty Customising with fancyhdr The fancyhdr package written by Piet van Oostrum provides a few s
58. formats we can include and then we will see how to do it T5 76 CHAPTER 9 IMPORTING GRAPHICS Document Options The graphics and graphicsx packages recognize the draft and final options given in the documentclass command at the start of the file Using draft as the option will suppress the inclusion of the image in the output file and will replace the contents with the name of the image file that would have been seen Using final will result in the image being placed in the output file The default is draft Supported image formats As explained before the image formats you can use depend on the driver that graphicx is using but since the driver is automatically chosen according to the compiler then the allowed image formats will depend on the compiler you are using Compiling with latex The only format you can include while compiling with latex is Encapsulated PostScript EPS The EPS format was defined by Adobe Systems for making it easy for applications to import postscript based graphics into documents Because an EPS file declares the size of the image it makes it easy for systems like LaTeX to arrange the text and the graphics in the best way EPS is a vector format this means that it can have very high quality if it is created properly with programs that are able to manage vector graphics It is also possible to store bit map pictures within EPS but they will need a lot of disk spac
59. give you a good picture Native Korean speakers have no problem picking the right particle but it cannot be determined which particle to use for references and other automatic text that will change while you edit 272 CHAPTER 35 INTERNATIONALIZATION the document It takes a painstaking effort to place appropriate particles manually ev ery time you add remove references or simply shuffle parts of your document around HLATEX relieves its users from this boring and error prone process In case you don t need Korean localization features but just want to typeset Korean text you can put the following line in the preamble instead usepackage hfont For more details on typesetting Korean with HLATEX refer to the HLATEX Guide Check out the web site of the Korean TEX User Group KTUG at http www ktug or kr Polish If you plan to use Polish in your UTF 8 encoded document use the following code usepackage ut 8 inputenc usepackage polski usepackage polish babel Portuguese Add the following code to your preamble usepackage portuguese babel usepackage latin1 inputenc usepackage T1 fontenc if you are in Brazil you can substitute the language for brazilian The first line is to get everything translated properly the second is for being able to input text correctly and the third one to get hyphenation right Note that we are using the latinl input encoding here so this will not work on a Mac or on DOS J
60. has 4 arguments the starting point the translation vector from one object to the next the number of objects and the object to be drawn The linethickness command applies to horizontal and vertical line segments but neither to oblique line segments nor to circles It does however apply to quadratic B zier curves THE PICTURE ENVIRONMENT 213 setlength unitlength 2mm begin picture 30 20 linethickness 0 075mm multiput 0 0 1 0 263 line 0 1 20 multiput 0 0 0 1 213 line 1 0 25 linethickness 0 15mm multiput 0 0 5 0 6 line 0 1 20 multiput 0 0 0 5 5 line 1 0 25 linethickness 0 3mm multiput 5 0 10 0 23 line 0 1 20 multiput 0 5 0 10 2 line 1 0 25 end picture Ovals The command put x y oval w h put y oval w h position produces an oval centered at y and having width and height h The op tional position arguments b t l r refer to top bottom left right and can be combined as the example illustrates Line thickness can be controlled by two kinds of commands linethickness length on the one hand thinlines and thicklines on the other While linethickness length applies to hor izontal and vertical lines and quadratic B zier curv
61. header and the footer renewcommand headrulewidth 0 5pt renewcommand footrulewidth Opt The first line for the header the second for the footer Setting it to zero means that there will be no line An example fancyhf lhead Andrew Roberts rhead today rfoot thepage It is often necessary to clear any defaults or a previous style definition and the first line of the above example will do this The commands are an alternative interface to customising the headers footers that fancyhdr offers and so by not passing anything to them it assumes that you want it all blank The result of these commands will put my name at the top left todays date at the top right and the current page number at the bottom right of the page Even if the document class was two sided because no optional text has been supplied for the even pages the style will be used for all pages This approach a serious bad point some pages like the title or the beginning of each chapter have no header or footer but with the code we have shown every page will get the same output There is a way to solve this problem you can use the fancyplain style If you do so you can use the command fancyplain inside lhead etc When LaTeX wants to create a page with an empty style it will insert the first argument of fancyplain in all the other cases it will use the second argument So an improved version of the previous code would be 124 CH
62. heading footer configuration so you can make your own Now you can cre ate what you want using the command fancyhead for header and fancyfoot for footer They work in the same way so we ll explain only the first one The syntax is fancyhead selectors output you want The selectors are the following E even page O odd page L left side C centered R right side so CE will refer to the center of the even pages and RO to the right side of the odd pages Whether it is header or footer depends if you are using fancyhead or fancyfoot You can use multiple selectors separated by a comma Here is an example fancyhead CE Author s Name fancyhead C0 today fancyfoot LE RO thepage it will print author s name on the center of the header of the even pages the date of the current day on the center of the odd pages and the current page number on the left size of even pages and on the right size of the odd pages Finally in order to have the pages at the beginning of any chapter really plain you could redefine the plain style for example to have a really plain page when you want The command to use is fancypagestyle plain and the argument can contain all the commands explained before An example is the following fancypagestyle plain 7 fancyhf remove everything renewcommand headrulewidth Opt remove lines as well renewcommand footrulewidth Opt Finally here is the complete code of a possible
63. is a separately definable quantity a dimension or length called parskip This is normally zero no space between paragraphs because that s how books are normally typeset but you can easily set it to any size you want with the setlength command in the Preamble setlength parskip 1cm This will set the space between paragraphs to 1cm Leaving multiple blank lines between paragraphs in your source document achieves nothing all extra blank lines get ignored by LaTeX because the space between paragraphs is controlled only by the value of parskip White space in LaTeX can also be made flexible what Lamport calls rubber lengths This means that values such as parskip can have a default dimension plus an amount of expansion minus an amount of contraction This is useful on pages in complex documents where not every page may be an exact number of fixed height lines long so some give and take in vertical space is useful You specify this in a setlength command like this setlength parskip icm plus4mm minus3mm Paragraph indentation can also be set with the setlength command although you would always make it a fixed size never a flexible one otherwise you would have very ragged looking paragraphs setlength parindent 6mm By default the first paragraph after a heading follows the standard Anglo American publishers practice of no indentation Subsequent paragraphs are indented by the value of parindent default 18pt Y
64. is omitted For all practical purposes input is no more than a simple automated cut and paste of the source code in filename tex The other main inclusion command is include include filename The include command is different from lt code gt input lt code gt in that it starts a new page just before inclusion Since a new page is started at every include command it is appropriate to use it for large entities such as book chapters Very large documents that usually include many files take a very long time to compile and most users find it convenient to test their last changes by including only the files they have been working on One option is to hunt down all include commands in the inclusion hierarchy and to comment them out include filename1 include filename2 include filename3 include filename4 24 CHAPTER 3 BASICS In this case the user wants to include only filename2 tex and filename3 tex the inclusion hierarchy is intricate commenting can become error prone it is then convenient to use the includeonly command in the preamble includeonly filename2 filename3 This way only include commands for the specified files will be executed and inclusion will be handled in only one place Note that there must be no spaces between the filenames and the commas Picking suitable filenames Never ever use directories folders or file names that contain spaces Although your operating system probably supp
65. its content CAPTIONS 87 Lists of figures and tables Captions can be listed at the beginning of a paper or report in a List of Tables or a List of Figures section by using the listoftables or listoffigures commands respectively The caption used for each figure will appear in these lists along with the figure numbers and page numbers that they appear on The caption command also has an optional parameter caption short long which is used for the List of Tables or List of Figures Typically the short description is for the caption listing and the long description will be placed beside the figure or table This is particularly useful if the caption is long and only a one liner is desired in the figure table listing Here is an example of this usage documentclass 12pt article usepackage graphicx begin document listoffigures section Introduction begin figure hb centering includegraphics width 4in gecko caption Close up of textit Hemidactylus sp Close up of textit Hemidactylus sp which is part the genus of the gecko family It is the second most speciose genus in the family end figure end document 88 CHAPTER 10 FLOATS FIGURES AND CAPTIONS List of Figures 1 Closeup of Hemidactylus sp ee 1 1 Introduction Figure 1 Close up of Hemidactylus sp which is part the genus of the gecko family It is the second most speciose genus in the family
66. know one of them it s called mbox It simply packs up a series of boxes into another one and can be used to prevent LaTeX from breaking two words As you can put boxes inside boxes these horizontal box packers give you ultimate flexibility makebox width pos text BOXES 227 width defines the width of the resulting box as seen from the outside This means it can be smaller than the material inside the box You can even set the width to Opt so that the text inside the box will be typeset without influencing the surrounding boxes Besides the length expressions you can also use width height depth and totalheight in the width parameter They are set from values obtained by measuring the typeset text The pos parameter takes a one letter value center flushleft flushright or spread the text to fill the box The command framebox works exactly the same as makebox but it draws a box around the text The following example shows you some things you could do with the makebox and framebox commands central makebox textwidth 5 P E q centra l par Guess I m framed now makebox textwidth s Bumer I am too wide S prea d par framebox 1 1 width Guess I m nn anad this framed now par framebox 0 8 width r Bummer I am too wide par framebox 1cm 1 never mind so am I Can you read this Now that we control the horizontal the obvious next step is to go
67. leqno Places the numbering of formulae on the left hand side in stead of the right titlepage notitlepage Specifies whether a new page should be started after the document title or not The article class does not start a new page by default while report and book do onecolumn twocolumn Instructs LaTeX to typeset the document in one column or two columns twoside oneside Specifies whether double or single sided output should be generated The classes article and report are single sided and the book class is double sided by default Note that this option concerns the style of the document only The option twoside does not tell the printer you use that it should actually make a two sided printout landscape Changes the layout of the document to print in landscape mode openright openany Makes chapters begin either only on right hand pages or on the next page available This does not work with the article class as it does not know about chapters The report class by default starts chapters on the next page available and the book class starts them on right hand pages draft makes LaTeX indicate hyphenation and justification prob lems with a small square in the right hand margin of the problem line so they can be located quickly by a human Table 3 2 Document Class Options For example if you want a report to be in 12pt type on A4 but printed one sided in draft mode you would use
68. markings on the head or wings They have stout longish bills and webbed feet Most gulls particularly Larus species are ground nesting carni vores which will take live food or scavenge opportunisticallv The live food often includes crabs and small fish Apart from the kittiwakes gulls are typically coastal or inland Figure 1 A gull species rarely venturing far out to sea The large species take up to four years to attain full adult plumage but two years is typical for small gulls Gulls the larger species in particular are resourceful and highly intel birds demonstratin complex methods of communication and a highl e g the Herring Gull have exhibited tool xist successfully with man and have thrived in human habitats Others rely on kleptoparasitism to get their food social structure Certain spec use behaviour Many species of gull have learned to leveloped 91 In this case it may look too shrunk but you can manage spaces the way you like In general you d better not to add any space at all let LaTeX do the formatting work you shouldn t worry about appearance moreover if LaTeX decided to add some space there will be a reason considering that LaTeX is such an old and stable program right Subfloats A useful extension is the subfig package which uses subfloats within a single float This gives the author the ability to have subfigures within figures or subtables within table floats
69. marks which replaces the offending text 196 CHAPTER 22 HYPERREF PACKAGE texorpdfstring TEX text Bookmark Text Math expressions are a prime candidate for this kind of problem section texorpdfstring E mc 2 E mc2 which turns section E mc 2 to E mc2 in the bookmark area Color changes also do not travel well into bookmarks section textcolor red Red produces the string redRed The command textcolor gets ignored but its argument red gets printed If you use section texorpdfstring textcolor red Red Red the result will be much more legible If you write your document in unicode and use the unicode option for the hyperref package you can use unicode characters in bookmarks This will give you a much larger selection of characters to pick from when when using texorpdfstring Problems with tables and figures Since hyperref points to the caption created within the float environment which is always set below a figure or table the figure or table itself will not be visible A workaround exists by using the package hypcap http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib oberdiek hypcap pdf with usepackage all hypcap Be sure to call this package after loading hyperref which should otherwise be loaded last http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib hyperref README Chapter 23 Listings Using the package listings you can add non formatted text as you would do with beg
70. mathematics is one of La TeX s greatest strengths However 16 is also a large topic due to the existence of so much mathematical notation If you are writing a document that needs only a few simple mathematical formulas then you can generally use plain LaTeX it will give you all of the tools you need However if you are writing a scientific document that contains numerous complicated formulas then you ll most likely need to use the amsmath package It introduces several new commands that are more powerful and easy to use than the ones provided by plain LaTeX Basic Mathematics plain LaTeX All the commands discussed in this section can be used in LaTeX without loading any external package What is here is enough if you just want to write a few formulas otherwise you d better read the advanced section as well In any case this is a necessary introduction to how LaTeX can manage mathematics Mathematics environments LaTeX needs to know beforehand that the subsequent text does in fact contain math ematical elements This is because LaTeX typesets maths notation differently than normal text Therefore special environments have been declared for this purpose They can be distinguished into two categories depending on how they are presented e text text formulas are displayed in line that is within the body of text where it is declared e g I can say that a a 2a within this sentence 129 130 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS e d
71. normal vertical distance between lines in a paragraph baselinestretch Multiplies baselineskip columnsep The distance between columns columnwidth The width of the column evensidemargin The margin for even pages think of a printed booklet Minewidth The width of a line in the local environment 285 286 APPENDIX B USEFUL MEASUREMENT MACROS oddsidemargin The margin for odd pages think of a printed booklet pagewidth The width of the page pageheight The height of the page parindent The normal paragraph indentation parskip The extra vertical space between paragraphs tabcolsep The default separation between columns in a tabular environment textheight The height of text on the page textwidth The width of the text on the page topmargin The size of the top margin unitlength Units of length in Picture Environment Length manipulation macros You can change the values of the variables defining the page layout with two commands With this one you can set a new value setlength parameter length with this other one you can add a value to the existing one addtolength parameter length See LaTeX Layout for samples using these Samples Resize an image to take exactly half the text width includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth mygraphic Make distance between items larger inside an itemize environment addtolength itemsep 0 5 baselineskip Appendix C Useful Size Commands
72. not explain any mathe matics The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters or of legal commercial philosophical ethical or political position regarding them The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are desig nated as being those of Invariant Sections in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed as Front Cover Texts or Back Cover Texts in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License A Front Cover Text may be at most 5 words and a Back Cover Text may be at most 25 words A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine readable copy repre sented in a format whose specification is available to the general public that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or for images composed of pixels generic paint programs or for drawings some widely available drawing editor and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic trans lation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters A copy made in an otherwise Transparent f
73. of program code we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license such as the GNU General Public License to permit their use in free software
74. preview of your title in the test_title pdf file Here is what you need to know to write your title e Alignment if you want to center some text just use begin center end center If you want to align it differently you can use the environment flushright for right alignment and flushleft for left alignment e Images the command for including images is the following the ex ample is for a small logo but you can introduce any image of any size includegraphics width 0 15 textwidth logo There is no begin figure as you usually do because you don t want it to be floating you just want it there where you placed it When handling it remember that it is considered like a big box by the TeX engine e Text size If you want to change the size of some text just place it within brackets like this and you can use the following commands in order of size HUGE Huge LARGE Large Marge small tiny So for example large this text is slightly bigger than normal this one is not e New lines you can force the start of a new line by If you want to add more vertical space you don t need to use several new line commands just insert some vertical space For example this way 1cm you start a new line after having left 1 cm of empty space A PRACTICAL EXAMPLE 41 e Date you can insert the date of the current day with the command today e Filling the page the command vfill keeps on adding empty spaces until t
75. raises the problem of how they are supposed to fit on the page and still leave room for text In this case LaTeX stacks them all up and prints them together if possible or leaves them to the end of the chapter in protest The skill is to space them out within your text so that they intrude neither on the thread of your argument or discussion nor on the visual balance of the typeset pages 83 84 CHAPTER 10 FLOATS FIGURES AND CAPTIONS Figures To create a figure that floats use the figure environment begin figure placement specifier figure contents end figure In the previous section I was saying how floats are used to allow Latex to handle figures whilst maintaining the best possible presentation However there may be times when you disagree and a typical example is with its positioning of figures The placement specifier parameter exists as a compromise and its purpose is to give the author a greater degree of control over where certain floats are placed Specifier Permission h Place the float here i e approximately at the same point it occurs in the source text however not exactly at the spot t Position at the top of the page b Position at the bottom of the page Put on a special page for floats only Override internal parameters Latex uses for determining good float positions H Places the float at precisely the location in the LaTeX code Re quires the float package e g
76. rfoot rf even rf odd Hopefully the behaviour of the above commands is fairly intuitive if it has head in it it affects the head etc and obviously J c and r means left centre and right respectively Documents can be either one or two sided Articles are by default one sided books are two sided Two sided documents differentiate the left even and right odd pages whereas one sided do not Watch out if you give long text in two different parts only in the footer or only in the header you might see overlapping text be careful There are special commands you can use as arguments PAGE STYLES 123 thepage number of the current page leftmark current chapter name printed like CHAPTER 3 THIS IS THE CHAPTER TITLE rightmark current section name printed like 1 6 THIS IS THE SECTION TITLE thesection current section number Note that leftmark and rightmark convert the names to uppercase whichever was the formatting of the text If you want them to print the actual name of the chapter without converting it to uppercase use the following command renewcommand chaptermark 1 markboth 1 renewcommand sectionmark 1 markright 1 now leftmark and rightmark will just print the name of the chapter and section without number and without affecting the formatting Moreover with the following commands you can define the thickness of the decorative lines on both the
77. same syntax but they have a sightly different meaning dfrac forces the fraction to be in display style equivalent to displaystyle frac 8 1 Sk T N tfrac forces the fraction to be in text style equivalent to textstyle frac for example you could force the display style of a fraction within a matrix environ ment using the amsmath shorter versions will keep your source code more readable For binom the dual commands are defined dbinom and tbinom Text over symbols If you want to write something over a symbol you can easily do it with the following command overset top symbol it will take top resize it and put it over sym bol With this command you can easily create new symbols like that are given by ner s overset and overset leq If you want to write under a symbol the dual command is Nunderset that works with the same syntax Anyway if you want to write some text over an arrow amsmath provides its own command xleftarrow up xleftarrow down up down it will create a left pointing arrow of the right length and will write up over it and optionally down under it For right pointing arrows use xrightarrow with the same syntax List of Mathematical Symbols All the pre defined mathematical symbols from the TeX package are listed below More symbols are available from extra packages 150 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS
78. simple tex A simple article to illustrate document structure Mdocumentclass article usepackage mathptmx begin document The first line is a comment as denoted by the sign The documentclass command takes an argument which in this case is article because that s the type of document we want to produce It is also possible to create your own as is often done by journal publishers who simply provide you with their own class file which tells Latex how to format your content But we ll be happy with the standard article class for now usepackage is an important command that tells Latex to utilize some external macros In this instance I specified mathptmx which means Latex will use the Postscript Times type 1 font instead of the default ComputerModern font And finally the begin document This strictly isn t part of the preamble but I ll put it here anyway as it implies the end of the preamble by nature of stating that the document is now starting Top Matter At the beginning of most documents there will be information about the document itself such as the title and date and also information about the authors such as name address email etc All of this type of information within Latex is collectively referred to as top matter Although never explicitly specified there is no topmatter command you are likely to encounter the term within Latex documentation A simple example documentclass 11pt a4paper onesi
79. single column on each side THE TABULAR ENVIRONMENT 65 begin tabular 1 6 c r Team amp P amp W amp D amp L amp F amp A amp Pts NN hline Manchester United amp 6 amp 4 amp O amp 2 amp 10 amp 5 amp 12 NN Celtic amp 6 amp 3 0 amp 3 8 amp 9 amp 9 Benfica amp 6 amp 2 amp 1 amp 3 amp 7 amp 8 amp 7 NN FC Copenhagen amp 6 amp 2 amp 1 amp 2 amp 5 NN end tabular Team P W D L A Pts Manchester United 6 4 0 2 10 5 12 Celtic 6 0 3 8 9 9 Benfica 6 2 1 3 7 8 7 FC Copenhagen 6 2 1 2 5 8 7 expressions The column separator can be specified with the construct It typically takes some text as its argument and when appended to a column it will automatically insert that text into each cell in that column before the actual data for that cell This command kills the inter column space and replaces it with whatever is between the curly braces To add space use hspace width Admittedly this is not that clear and so will require a few examples to clarify Sometimes it is desirable in scientific tables to have the numbers aligned on the decimal point This can be achieved by doing the following begin tabular r 1 3 14159 3 amp 14159 NN 16 2 16 amp 2 NN 123 456 123 amp 456 NN end tabular Its space suppressing qualities actually make it quite useful for manipulating the horizontal spacing between columns Given a basic table and varying the column descriptions
80. some 98 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING spaces between words may be a bit too large but long words will be placed properly This is a paragraph with a very long word ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPRST then we have an another bad thing a long number 1234567890123456789 begin sloppypar This is a paragraph with a very long word ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPRST then we have an another bad thing a long number 1234567890123456789 end sloppypar This is a paragraph with a very long word ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PRST then we have an another bad thing a long number 1234567890123456789 This is a paragraph with a very long word ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPRST then we have an another bad thing a long num ber 1234567890123456789 Ligatures Some letter combinations are typeset not just by setting the different letters one after the other but by actually using special symbols like ff called ligatures Ligatures can be prohibited by inserting between the two letters in question This might be necessary with words built from two words Here is an example Not shelfful vere mcrae but shelfful but shelf ful Slash marks The normal typesetting of the character in LaTeX does not allow following characters to be broken on to new lines which often create overfull errors in output where letters push off the margin Words that use slash marks such as input output should be typeset as input slash output which allow the line to
81. style you could use for a two sided document usepackage fancyhdr setlength headheight 15pt pagestyle fancy renewcommand chaptermark 1 markboth 1 renewcommand sectionmark 1 markright 1 fancyhf fancyhead LE RO thepage fancyhead RE textit nouppercase leftmark 126 CHAPTER 12 PAGE LAYOUT fancyhead L0 textit nouppercase rightmark fancypagestyle plain fancyhf remove everything renewcommand headrulewidth Opt remove lines as well renewcommand footrulewidth Opt Page n of m Some people like to put the current page number in context with the whole document LaTeX only provides access to the current page number However you can use the lastpage package to find the total number of pages like this usepackage lastpage cfoot thepage of pageref LastPage Note the capital letters Also add a backslash after thepage to ensure adequate space between the page number and of And recall when using references that you have to run LaTeX an extra time to resolve the cross references Multi column Pages It is common to see articles and conference proceedings formatted with two columns of text However such publishers will usually provide you with their own document class which automatically implements this format without you having to do anything It is very easy to format your page in this way If you are using a standard Latex document cl
82. the picture environment of LaTeX2e brings with it the qbezier command q meaning quadratic Many frequently used curves such as circles ellipses and catenaries can be satisfactorily approximated by quadratic B zier curves although this may require some mathematical toil If a programming language like Java is used to generate qbezier blocks of LaTeX input files the picture environment becomes quite powerful Although programming pictures directly in LaTeX is severely restricted and often rather tiresome there are still reasons for doing so The documents thus produced are small with respect to bytes and there are no additional graphics files to be dragged along Packages like epic eepic or pstricks enhance the original picture environment and greatly strengthen the graphical power of LaTeX While the former two packages just enhance the picture environment the pstricks package has its own drawing environment pspicture The power of pstricks stems from the fact that this package makes extensive use of PostScript possibilities In addition numerous packages have been written for specific purposes One of them is XY pic described at the end of this chapter A wide variety of these packages is 207 208 CHAPTER 27 PRODUCING MATHEMATICAL GRAPHICS described in detail in The LaTeX Graphics Companion not to be confused with The LaTeX Companion Perhaps the most powerful graphical tool related with LaTeX is MetaPost the twi
83. the actual file is read with input By setting blackandwhite to false the color version of the document would be produced Creating your own package If you define a lot of new environments and commands the preamble of your document will get quite long In this situation it is a good idea to create a LaTeX package containing all your command and environment definitions You can then use the usepackage command to make the package available in your document Writing a package basically consists of copying the contents of your document preamble into a separate file with a name ending in sty It is very simple just follow the steps 1 create a simple text file called mypack sty or any other name you like and open it with any text editor 2 at the very beginning of the text document just write ProvidesPackage mypack CREATING YOUR OWN STYLE 235 3 note it has to have the same name of the file without the extension It tells LaTeX the name of the package and will allow it to issue a sensible error message when you try to include a package twice 4 write whatever you want in it using all the LaTeX commands you know Nor mally you should define new commands or import other packages 5 import your new package with the known commandNusepackagetmypack the file mypack sty and the LaTeX source you are compiling must be in the same directory It will be like that all you have written within your package were within the document itself
84. the mid 1990 s it took a considerable amount of time and effort to set up a Korean capable environment under a non localized non Korean operating system You can skim through the now much outdated http jshin net faq to get a glimpse of what it was like to use Korean under non Korean OS in mid 1990 s These days all three major operating systems Mac OS Unix Windows come equipped with pretty decent multilingual support and internationalization features so that editing Korean text file is not so much of a problem anymore even on non Korean operating systems 2 TEX and LATEX were originally written for scripts with no more than 256 char acters in their alphabet To make them work for languages with considerably more characters such as Korean or Chinese a subfont mechanism was devel oped It divides a single CJK font with thousands or tens of thousands of glyphs into a set of subfonts with 256 glyphs each For Korean there are three widely used packages HLATEX by UN Koaunghi hLATEXp by CHA Jaechoon and the CJK package byWerner Lemberg HLATEX and hLATEXp are specific to Korean and provide Korean localization on top of the font support They both can process Korean input text files encoded in EUC KR HLATEX can even process input files encoded in CP949 Windows 949 UHC and UTF 8 when used along with A Q The CJK package is not specific to Korean It can process input files in UTF 8 as well as in various CJK encodings including EUC KR and CP
85. the object to be referenced is in the same page it works just like ref if the object is far away it will print something like 5 on page 25 i e it adds the page number automatically If the object is close it can use more refined sentences like on the next page or on the facing page automatically according to the context and the document class This command has to be used very carefully It outputs more than one word so it may happen its output to stay between two different pages In this case the algorithm can get confused and cause a loop Let s make an example You label an object on page 23 and the vref output happens to stay between page 23 and 24 If it were on page 23 it would print like the basic ref if it were on page 24 it would print on the previous page but it is on both and this may cause some strange errors at compiling time that are very hard to be fixed You could think that this happens very rarely unfortunately if you write a long document you often edit with more than 100 references situations like these are likely to happen A possible way to avoid problems is to use the standard ref all the time and convert it to vref when you are close to the final version of your document The hyperref package and autoref The hyperref package introduces another useful command autoref This com mand creates a reference with additional text corresponding to the targets type all of which will be
86. the repository For instance the authors can ask the librarian to get the latest version of their projects or to commit a new version to the librarian see http blogs linux ie balor 2007 05 23 Each user has a local working copy of a part of a remote repository For in stance users can update changes from the repository to their working copy commit changes from their own working copy to the repository or re view the differences between working copy and repository To set up a Subversion version control system the Subversion server software has to be installed on a single computer with permanent internet access If this computer has no static IP address one can use a service like DynDNS http www dyndns com to be able to access the server with a static hostname It can run on many Unix modern MS Windows and Mac OS X platforms Users do not have to install the Subversion server software but a Subversion client software This is the unique way to access the repositories on the server Besides the basic Subversion command line client there are several Graphical User Interface Tools GUIs and plug ins for accessing the Subversion server see http subversion tigris org links html Additionally there are very good manuals about Subversion freely available on the internet e g http svnbook red bean com At our department we run the Subversion server on a GNU Linux system be cause most Linus d
87. to include some command in the preamble of the document Consider the following example usepackage T1 fontenc usepackage light math iwona Useful example Following is an useful example found at google discussion groups http groups google com group latexlovers browse_thread thread ecd10df0d05f0501 0d3192f b8e3826da 0d3192fb8e3826da The example demonstrates how to select different fonts in a simple document documentclass book newcommand blah blah blah blah blah blah begin document blah blah blah blah renewcommand rmdefault ppl normalfont upshape blah blah blah blah renewcommand rmdefault iwona normalfont upshape blah blah blah blah end document 229 230 CHAPTER 29 FONTS XeTeX XeTeX and fontspec simplify font management considerably additionaly enabling use of advanced typographic features See XeTeX entry on Wikipedia for a visual example Some useful websites The Latex Font Catalogue LaTeX font commands How to change fonts from Times Roman to Helvetica in Latex LaTeX Fonts Chapter 30 Customizing LaTeX Documents produced with the commands you have learned up to this point will look acceptable to a large audience While they are not fancy looking they obey all the established rules of good typesetting which will make them easy to read and pleasant to look at However there are situations where LaTeX does not provide a command or environment that matches your needs or
88. to name but three The purpose of this tutorial is to show you how to configure your pages Page Dimensions A page in Latex is defined by myriad internal parameters Each parameter corresponds to the length of an element of the page for example paperheight is the physical height of the page Here you can see a diagram showing all the variables defining the page 117 CHAPTER 12 PAGE LAYOUT 118 PAGE DIMENSIONS 119 one inch hoffset one inch voffset oddsidemargin 31pt topmargin 20pt headheight 12pt headsep 25pt textheight 592pt textwidth 390pt O Ot Cose marginparsep 10pt marginparwidth 35pt footskip 30pt e marginparpush 7pt not shown e hoffset Opt e voffset Opt e paperwidth 597pt e paperheight 845pt It will not have been immediately obvious because it doesn t really cause any serious problems that the default page size for all standard document classes is US letter This is shorter by 18 mm about 3 4 inch and slightly wider by 8 mm about 1 4 inch compared to A4 which is the standard in almost all the rest of the world As I said it s not a great problem and most printers will print the page without a hiccup However it is possible to specify alternative sizes documentclass a4paper article The above example illustrates how to pass the optional argument to the documentclass
89. up 1 page and 232 bytes of space This way you created the DVI file but with the same source file you can create a PDF document The steps are exactly the same as before but you have to replace the command latex with pdflatex 1 Type the command pdflatex hello as before the tex extension is not re quired 2 Various bits of info about LaTeX and its progress will be displayed If all went well the last two lines displayed in the console will be Output written on hello pdf 1 page 5548 bytes Transcript written on hello log you can notice that the PDF document is bigger than the DVI even if it contains exactly the same information The main differences between the DVI and PDF formats are e DVI needs less disk space and it is faster to create It does not include the fonts within the document so if you want the document to be viewed properly on another computer there must be all the necessary fonts installed It does not support any interactivity such as hyperlinks or animated images DVI viewers are not very common so you can consider using it for previewing your document while typesetting e PDF needs more disk space and it is slower to create but it includes all the necessary fonts within the document so you will not have any problem of porta bility It supports internal and external hyperlinks Nowadays it is the de facto standard for sharing and publishing documents so you can consider using it for the final version
90. use the gathered environment within equation Here is an example Nbeginfequation begin gathered 0 2 0 3 2 0 end gathered end equation ax 0 ar br 0 2 ax br 0 ADVANCED MATHEMATICS AMS MATH PACKAGE 143 Several centered formulas each with its own label When you want to show several formulas on different lines but you want to be able to reference each of them by a different number you have to use gather Here is an example begin gather ax b 0O ax2 bx c 20N ax 3 bx72 cx d 0 end gather ax b 0 3 ax br c 0 4 az bx cx d 0 5 If you want to number all the lines but one or two you can add the command notag on the line you want not to be numbered Several formulas any alignment without label When you want to show one or several formulas with a particular alignment you want to define you have to use flalign Adding a you start a new line using amp you can manage the alignment On each line you can add as many amp as you want but there must be the same number of any line otherwise LaTeX returns an error On each line the alignment is managed as following begin flalign right amp left amp right amp left amp right amp left right amp left amp right amp left amp right amp left end flalign you can add multiple amp without anything between them for example
91. with LaTeX these will be automatically found in the directories that they are installed Also make sure the name of the bst file you want to use is reflected in the bibliographystyle style command but don t include the bst extension Localizing bibliography appearance When writing documents in languages other than English you may find it desirable to adapt the appearance of your bibliography to the document language This concerns words such as editors and or in as well as a proper typographic layout The babelbib package can be used here For example to layout the bibliography in German add the following to the header usepackage fixlanguage babelbib selectbiblanguage german Alternatively you can layout each bibliography entry according to the language of the cited document usepackage babelbib The language of an entry is specified as an additional field in the BibTeX entry article mueller08 ess language german F For babelbib to take effect a bibliography style supported by it one of babplain babplai3 babalpha babunsrt bababbrv and bababbr3 must be used bibliographystyle babplain bibliography sample Getting Bibliographic data Many online databases provide bibliograhic data in BibTeX Format making it easy to build your own database For example Google Scholar offers the option to return prop erly formatted output but you must turn it on in the Preferences Here is an e
92. with appearance it makes the list of possible topics quite eclectic text style font size paragraph alignment interline spacing indents special paragraph types list structures footnotes margin notes etc A lot of the formatting techniques are required to differentiate certain elements from the rest of the text It is often necessary to add emphasis to key words or phrases A numbered or bulleted list is also commonly used as a clear and concise way of communicating an important issue Footnotes are useful for providing extra information or clarification without interrupting the main flow of text So for these reasons formatting is very important However it is also very easy to abuse and a document that has been over done can look and read worse than one with none at all Text formatting Hyphenation LaTeX hyphenates words whenever necessary If the hyphenation algorithm does not find the correct hyphenation points you can remedy the situation by using the follow ing commands to tell TeX about the exception The command hyphenation word list causes the words listed in the argument to be hyphenated only at the points marked by The argument of the command should only contain words built from normal letters or rather signs that are considered to be normal letters by LaTeX The hyphen ation hints are stored for the language that is active when the hyphenation command occurs This means that if you place a hyphenation comma
93. with the command put x y line x1 y1 length The Mine command has two arguments 1 a direction vector 2 a length The components of the direction vector are restricted to the integers 6 5 5 6 and they have to be coprime no common divisor except 1 The figure below illustrates all 25 possible slope values in the first quadrant The length is relative to unitlength The length argument is the vertical coordinate in the case of a vertical line segment the horizontal coordinate in all other cases setlength unitlength 5cm begin picture 1 1 put 0 0 line 0 1 1 put 0 0 line 1 0 13 put 0 0 line 1 1 1 put 0 0 line 1 2 5 put 0 0 line 1 3 3333 put 0 0 line 1 4 25 put 0 0 line 1 5 2 put 0 0 line 1 6 1667 put 0 0 line 2 1 1 put 0 0 line 2 3 6667 put 0 0 line 2 5 4 put 0 0 line 3 1 1 put 0 0 line 3 2 1 put 0 0 line 3 4 75 put 0 0 line 3 5 6 put 0 0 line 4 1 13 put 0 0 line 4 3 1 put 0 0 line 4 5 8 put 0 0 line 5 1 1 put 0 0 line 5 2 1 put 0 0 line 5 3 13 put 0 0 line 5 4 13 put 0 0 line 5 6 8333 put 0 0 line 6 1 1 put 0 0 line 6 5 13 end picture 210 CHAPTER 27 PRODUCING MATHEMATICAL GRAPHICS Arrows Arrows are drawn with the command put y vector x1 y1
94. you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer the original version will prevail If a section in the Document is Entitled Acknowledgements Dedications or History the requirement section 4 to Preserve its Title section 1 will typically require changing the actual title 9 TERMINATION You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Document except as ex pressly provided for under this License Any other attempt to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Document is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 10 FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns See http www gnu org copyleft Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number If the Docu ment specifies that a particular numbered version of this License or any later version applies to it you have th
95. you can separate names of different directories So by you refer to the current directory by you refer to the previous directory by you refer to two upper directories in the filesystem tree Writing input filename tex will have exactly the same effect as writing input filename tex but if you want to put all your files in a different directory called myfiles you can refer to that file by input myfiles filename tex This lets you put your files wherever you want Do not leave empty spaces in the filenames they can cause ambiguous behavior Use underscores _ instead It should be noted that LaTeX uses forward slashes even when on a Microsoft Windows platform that normally uses backslashes 226 CHAPTER 28 ADVANCED TOPICS Using includeonly When writing a large document it is sometimes useful to work on one section of the document In LaTeX the command includeonly filename1 filename2 includes only the files specified between the brackets when used in the preamble of the document This requires that there are include commands in the document specifying these files The filename should be written without the tex file extension include filename1 include filename2 Boxes LaTeX builds up its pages by pushing around boxes At first each letter is a little box which is then glued to other letters to form words These are again glued to other words but with special glue which is elastic so that a serie
96. 007 Director Doe amp Co 35 Anthony Road Newport Ipswich IP3 5RT Dear Sir or Madam I am writing to you on behalf of the Wikipedia project http www wikipedia org an endeavour to build a fully fledged multilingual encyclopaedia in an entirely open manner to ask for permission to use your copyrighted material That said allow me to reiterate that your material will be used to the noble end of providing a free collection of knowledge for everyone naturally enough only if you agree If that is the case could you kindly fill in the attached form and post it back to me We shall greatly appreciate it Thank you for your time and consideration I look forward to your reply Yours Faithfully Joe Bloggs P S You can find the full text of GFDL license at http www gnu org copyleft fdl html encl Copyright permission form Figure 18 1 A sample letter Here is the example s code documentclass letter signature Joe Bloggs address 21 Bridge Street Smallville Dunwich DU3 4WE begin document begin letter Director NX Doe amp Co NX 35 Anthony Road Newport Ipswich IP3 5RT ENVELOPES 175 opening Dear Sir or Madam I am writing to you on behalf of the Wikipedia project http www wikipedia org an endeavour to build a fully fledged multilingual encyclopaedia in an entirely open manner to ask for permission to use your copyrighted material ldots The ldots comm
97. 1 some external co authors do not have access to the common texmf tree On the other hand all files that are automatically created or modified during the compilation process e g aut aux bbl bix blg dvi glo gls idx ilg ind ist lof log lot nav out pdf ps snm and toc files or by the LaTeX or BibTeX editor e g bak bib kilepr prj sav tcp tmp tps and tex files generally should be not under version control because these files are not necessary for compilation and generally do not in clude additional information Furthermore these files are regularly modified so that conflicts are very likely Subversion really makes the difference A great feature of a version control system is that all authors can easily trace the workflow of a project by viewing the differences between arbitrary versions of the files Authors are primarily interested in effective modifications of the source code that change the compiled document but not in ineffective modifications that have no impact on the compiled document e g the position of line breaks Software tools for comparing text documents diff tools generally cannot differentiate between effective and ineffective modifications they highlight both types of modifications This considerably increases the effort to find and review the effective modifications Therefore ineffective modifications sho
98. 949 Windows 949 UHC it can be used to typeset documents with multilin gual content especially Chinese Japanese and Korean The CJK package has no Korean localization such as the one offered by HLATEX and it does not come with as many special Korean fonts as HLATEX 3 The ultimate purpose of using typesetting programs like TEX and LATEX is to get documents typeset in an aesthetically satisfying way Arguably the most important element in typesetting is a set of welldesigned fonts The HLATEX dis tribution includes UHC PostScript fonts of 10 different families and Munhwabu fonts TrueType of 5 different families The CJK package works with a set of fonts used by earlier versions of HLATEX and it can use Bitstream s cyberbit True Type font To use the HLATEX package for typesetting your Korean text put the following declaration into the preamble of your document usepackage hangul This com mand turns the Korean localization on The headings of chapters sections subsec tions table of content and table of figures are all translated into Korean and the formatting of the document is changed to follow Korean conventions The package also provides automatic particle selection In Korean there are pairs of post fix par ticles grammatically equivalent but different in form Which of any given pair is correct depends on whether the preceding syllable ends with a vowel or a consonant It is a bit more complex than this but this should
99. APTER 12 PAGE LAYOUT pagestyle fancyplain fancyhf lhead fancyplain Andrew Roberts rhead fancyplain today rfoot fancyplain thepage It has the same behavior of the previous code but you will get empty header and footer in the title and at the beginning of chapters For two sided it s common to mirror the style of opposite pages you tend to think in terms of inner and outer So the same example as above for two sided is lhead Andrew Roberts rhead Andrew Roberts lhead today rhead today 1 thepage rfoot thepage This is effectively saying my name is top outer todays date is top inner and current page number is bottom outer You can use the fancyplain command within them for two sided documents too As an example here is the complete code of a basic configuration you could use for a real document usepackage fancyhdr setlength headheight 15pt pagestyle fancyplain renewcommand chaptermark 1 markboth 1 lhead fancyplain thepage chead rhead fancyplain textit leftmark 1foot cfoot rfoot NB If you want to make the article class two sided use documentclass twoside article Another approach with fancyhdr If you want to get different style for even and odd pages there is another possi ble way still using fancyhdr Start again with fancyhf it will just delete the PAGE STYLES 125 current
100. CP IP connections they can be used from different computers with internet connection A restrictive firewall policy might prevent the version control system from connecting to the internet In this case the network administrator has to be asked to open the appropriate port The internet is only used for synchronising the files Hence a permanent internet connection is not required The only drawback of a version control system could be that a it has to be installed and configured Moreover a version control system is useful even if a single user is working on a project First the user can track and possibly revoke all previous modifications Second this is a convenient way to have a backup of the files on other computers e g on the version control server Third this allows the user to easily switch between different computers e g office laptop home The Version Control System Subversion At our department we decided to use the open source version control system Sub version http subversion tigris org This software is considered as an im provement of the popular version control system CVS The Subversion SVN version control system is based on a central Subversion server that hosts the repositories HOSTING LATEX FILES IN SUBVERSION 239 A Repository can be thought of as a library where authors keep successive revisions of one or more documents The version control systems acts as the librarian between the author and
101. DRESS l O CrTY STATE ZIP Figure 18 2 A sample envelope to be printed in landscape mode This will certainly take care of the spacing but the actual printing is between you and your printer After all different printers have different feeding mechanisms for envelopes You may find the following commands useful for printing the envelope In the first line dvips command converts the dvi file produced by latex into a ps PostScript file In the second line pdflatex converts the source tex file into a pdf file and xpdf opens that file that is not necessary for the third line to work as expected In the third line the PostScript file is sent to the printer latex envelope tex amp amp dvips t unknown T 9 5in 4 125in envelope dvi amp amp gv envelope ps SOURCES 177 pdflatex envelope tex amp amp xpdf envelope pdf lpr o landscape envelope ps I have found that pdflatex creates the right page size but not dvips despite what it says in the geometry manual It will never work though unless your printer settings are adjusted to the correct page style These settings depend on the printer filter you are using and in CUPS might be available on the lpr command line if you are masochistic Sources e Hypertext Help with LaTeX 178 CHAPTER 18 LETTERS Chapter 19 Packages Add on features for LaTeX are known as packages Dozens of these are pre installed with LaTeX and can be used in your documents immediately
102. Document Format This is the main result of a LaTeX compile run with pdflatex You can look at its content or print it with any PDF viewer log Gives a detailed account of what happened during the last compiler run toc Stores all your section headers It gets read in for the next compiler run and is used to produce the table of content lof This is like toc but for the list of figures lot And again the same for the list of tables aux Another file that transports information from one compiler run to the next Among other things the aux file is used to store information associated with cross references idx If your document contains an index LaTeX stores all the words that go into the index in this file Process this file with makeindex ind The processed idx file ready for inclusion into your document on the next compile cycle ilg Logfile telling what makeindex did Table 3 4 Common file extensions in LaTeX 26 CHAPTER 3 BASICS Chapter 4 Document Structure The main point of writing a text is to convey ideas information or knowledge to the reader The reader will understand the text better if these ideas are well structured and will see and feel this structure much better if the typographical form reflects the logical and semantical structure of the content LaTeX is different from other typesetting systems in that you just have to tell it the logical and semantical structure of a text I
103. E ROOT 251 usepackage amsmath numberwithin equation section numberwithin figure section The same can be done with similar counter types and document units such as subsection New Square Root While writing Mathematics some people prefer writing the square root closing it over its content This way it will look clearer what is inside the square root and what is not This habit is not normally used while writing with the computer because the text is supposed to be clear anyway but if you want to change the output of the square root anyway LaTeX gives you this possibility Just add the following code at the beginning of your document where you would place a usepackage command New definition of square root it renames sqrt as oldsqrt let oldsqrt sqrt it defines the new sqrt in terms of the old one def sqrt mathpalette DHLhksqrt def DHLhksqrt 1 2 setbox0 hbox 1 oldsqrt 2 dimen0 ht0O advance dimen0 0 2 ht0 setbox2 hbox vrule height htO depth dimen0 box0 lower0 4pt box2 a a b b This is a TeX code that first renames the sqrt command as oldsqrt then redefines sqrt in terms of the old one adding something more The new square root can be seen in the picture on the right compared to the old one Unfortunately this code won t work if you want to use multiple roots if you try to write v a as sqrt b a after you used the code above you ll just get a wrong out
104. John Doe and Jane Doe date today maketitle If you are provided with a class file from a publisher or if you use the AMS article class amsart then you can use several different commands to enter author information The email address is at the end and the texttt commands formats the email address using a mono spaced font The built in command called today will be replaced with the current date when processed by LaTeX But you are free to put whatever you want as a date in no set order If braces are left empty then the date is omitted Using this approach you can create only basic output whose layout is very hard to change If you want to create your title freely see the Title Creation section Abstract As most research papers have an abstract there are predefined commands for telling LaTeX which part of the content makes up the abstract This should appear in its logical order therefore after the top matter but before the main sections of the body This command is available for the document class article and report but not book 30 CHAPTER 4 DOCUMENT STRUCTURE documentclass article begin document beginfabstract Your abstract goes here end abstract end document By default LaTeX will use the word Abstract as a title for your abstract if you want to change it into anything else e g Executive Summary add the following line in the preamble renewcommand abstractname Executive Summa
105. LaTeX by Wikibooks contributors Created on Wikibooks the open content textbooks collection Copyright 2005 2008 Wikibooks contributors Permission is granted to copy distribute and or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections no Front Cover Texts and no Back Cover Texts A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License Contents 1 Introduction 2 Absolute Beginners The DaTeX source oa xo ces ueeco e ede od od dem Wer Ys ey AXE B Our first document eee E E E kou X 40x Sex AS s E 3 Basics 4 Document Structure The document environment 5 Errors and Warnings Error Messages 2o oa ko Ha RR Re x RUE Kx eh oo gaa eS Dr noD PC cT Dc m Beek RA ER Reh EASE GS SE 6 Title Creation Create thetithe 444 4 ue REARS Eee ee eee RUE a A practicalexample s e gus dood waka ae ee ba ee SAE EE Insert it ii YOUrCOCUMENE ecs o ee wow ES 7 Bibliography Management Embed system s i 2 ba Sai AUR US AS RE SESS OS Citations 4 3 ane eee awe Ea ed ba EUR e Box NOVO 43d uq BibTeX 3 64434440464 bee E e ld d d a Natbib a a Se ee ee eS 8 Tables The tabular environfmienU 2 cm ee ae e
106. LaTeX supports the most common picture formats around The graphicx package As stated before LaTeX can t manage pictures directly so we will need some extra help we have to load the graphicx package in the preamble of our document usepackage graphicx This package accepts as an argument the external driver to be used to manage pictures luckily the recent version of this package takes care of everything by itself changing the driver according to the compiler you are using so you don t have to worry about anything Just in case you want to understand better how it works here are the possible options you can pass to the package e dvips default if compiling with latex if you are compiling with latex to get a DVI and you want to see your document with a DVI or PS viewer e dvipdfm if you are compiling with latex to get a DVI that you want to convert to PDF using dvipdfm to see your document with any PDF viewer e pdftex default if compiling with pdflatez if you are compiling with pdftez to get a PDF that you will see with any PDF viewer but again you don t need to pass any option to the package because the default settings are fine most of the cases In many respects importing your images into your document using LaTeX is fairly simple once you have your images in the right format that is Therefore I fear for many people the biggest effort will be the process of converting their graphics files Now we will see which
107. MENT 215 setlength unitlength 0 5mm begin picture 120 168 newsavebox foldera savebox foldera 40 32 bl definition MES multiput 0 0 0 28 2 line 1 0 40 multiput 0 0 40 0 2 line 0 1 28 put 1 28 oval 2 2 t1 put 1 29 line 1 0 5 put 9 29 oval 6 6 t1 put 9 32 line 1 0 8 put 17 29 oval 6 6 tr put 20 29 line 1 0 19 put 39 28 oval 2 2 tr newsavebox folderb savebox folderb 40 32 1 definition put 0 14 line 1 0 8 put 8 0 usebox foldera put 34 26 line 0 1 102 put 14 128 usebox foldera multiput 34 86 0 37 3 usebox folderb end picture 216 CHAPTER 27 PRODUCING MATHEMATICAL GRAPHICS Quadratic B zier Curves setlength unitlength 0 8cm begin picture 6 4 linethickness 0 075mm multiput 0 0 1 0 7 line 0 1 4 multiput 0 0 0 1 5 line 1 0 6 thicklines put 0 5 0 5 line 1 5 0 5 put 1 3 line 4 1 23 Nqbezier 0 5 0 5 1 3 3 3 5 thinlines put 2 5 2 line 2 1 3 put 5 5 0 5 line 1 5 0 5 linethickness 1mm qbezier 2 5 2 5 5 0 5 5 3 thinlines qbezier 4 2 4 3 3 3 qbezier 3 3 2 3 2 2 qbezier 2 2 2 1 3 1 qbezier 3 1 4 1 4 2 end picture As this example illustrates splitting up a circle into 4 quadratic B zier cu
108. PENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and inde pendent documents or works in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit When the Document is included in an aggregate this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document 309 If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate the Document s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate 8 TRANSLATION Iranslation is considered a kind of modification so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4 Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections You may include a translation of this License and all the license notices in the Document and any Warranty Disclaimers provided that
109. R ee 3 Romo The table environment captioning ete 00 The tabular environment controlling table width The tabularx package simple column stretching ss Vertically centered images s s ouo o Ro RR RO Professional tables ss s oe va a de eee Rn Need more complicated features 15 15 18 21 27 27 35 35 35 36 39 39 41 44 45 45 46 4T 57 DUMMA o h os dadka a ow we KERN Box Rm a ee Aue bx au ud 9 Importing Graphics The graphicx package 2303 mob ORY o X qe RON EUR UXOR NMG CT CC CLP eee ee eee be oe tee eS 10 Floats Figures and Captions Do o Ce A A OR EG 4 o aa a a et een ee eek BG Re dede Gees 11 Formatting Text formatling P a RA A ww es Paragraph Formatting eh A a ee SS Special Paragraphs i i Ye 4 wd eure ea Ad RE List Structures oa omg eae eee uuo UR OR Ro Roh db oe tom amp Pcr Margin Notes edem ee bed ee HG ere ea S SUMMA EP IECIT 12 Page Layout Pape Dimensions 2 xum a a ROO e UR eee o poe ws Page Orientanom lt 2 4 sea ED Redeem E E oe ees Page Styles 6 4 oF 4 Oc ccc Multi column Pages 0 Manual Page Form tting
110. RONMENT 31 Command Level comment art art not in letters part part 1 t in lett chapter chapter only books and reports section section not in letters subsection subsection not in letters b i gt sub ion ti tt subsubsection subsubsection not in letters paragraph paragraph not in letters subparagraph subparagraph not in letters Ou BY Ww dD FR c section Effect on staff turnover An analysis of the effect of the revised recruitment policies on staff turnover at divisional headquarters Section numbering Numbering of the sections is performed automatically by LaTeX so don t bother adding them explicitly just insert the heading you want between the curly braces Parts get roman numerals Part I Part II etc chapters and sections get decimal numbering like this document and appendices which are just a special case of chap ters and share the same structure are lettered A B C etc You can change the depth to which section numbering occurs so you can turn it off selectively By default it is set to 2 If you only want parts chapters and sections numbered not subsections or subsubsections etc you can change the value of the secnumdepth counter using the setcounter command giving the depth level from the previous table For example if you want to change it to 1 setcounter secn
111. S begin wrapfigure r 0 5 textwidth begin center includegraphics width 0 48 textwidth 6011 end center caption A gull end wrapfigure Gulls are birds in the family Laridae They are most closely related to the terns family Sternidae auks and skimmers and more distantly to the waders Moet gulls belong to the large genus Larus P hey are in general medium to large birds typically grev or white often with black markings on the head or wings They have stout longish bills and webbed feet lost gi particularly Larus s opportunis food often includes crabs and smal fish Apart from the kittiwakes gulls are typically coastal or inland species rarely venturing far out to sea The large species take up to four years to attain full adult Figure 1 A gull plumage but two years is typical for small gulls Gulls the larger species in particular are resourceful and highly intelligent birds demonstrating complex methods of communication and a highly developed social structure Certain species e g the Herring Gull have exhibited tool Note that we have specified a size for both the wrapfigure environment and the image we have included We did it in terms of the text width it is always better to use relative sizes in LaTeX let LaTeX do the work for you The wrap is slightly bigger than the picture so the compiler will not return any strange warning and you will have a small white fra
112. Subfloats have their own caption and an optional global caption An example will best illustrate the usage of this package begin figure centering subfloat A gull label fig gul1 includegraphics width 0 3 textwidth gul1 subfloat A tiger label fig tiger includegraphics width 0 3 textwidth tiger subfloat A mouse label fig mouse includegraphics width 0 3 textwidth mouse caption Pictures of animals label fig animals end figure 92 CHAPTER 10 FLOATS FIGURES AND CAPTIONS a A gull b A tiger c A mouse Figure 1 Pictures of animals You will notice that the figure environment is set up as usual You may also use a table environment for subtables For each subfloat you need to use subfloat sub caption figure or table If you intend to cross reference any of the subfloats see where the label is inserted caption will provide the global caption subfig will arrange the figures or tables side by side providing they can fit otherwise it will automatically shift subfloats below This effect can be added manually by putting the newline command before the figure you wish to move to a newline Horizontal spaces between figures is controlled by one of several commands which are placed in between each subfloat command e Any whitespace such as spaces returns and tabs will result in one regular space e Math spaces qquad quad and e Generic space hspace l
113. The following type size commands in order of increasing font size are supported by LaTeX e tiny e scriptsize e footnotesize e small e normalsize default e large e Large capital 4I e LARGE all caps e huge e Huge capital h The default for normalsize is 10 point but it may differ for some Document Styles or their options The actual size produced by these commands also depends on the Document Style and in some styles more than one of these size commands may produce the same actual size The new size takes effect immediately after the size command if an entire para graph or unit is set in a certain size the size command should include the blank line or the end which delimites the unit See Declarations These commands cannot be used in math mode However part of a formula may be set in a different size by using an mbox command containing the size command See also Formatting 287 288 APPENDIX C USEFUL SIZE COMMANDS Appendix D sample LaTeX documents The easiest way to learn how to use latex is to look at how other people use it Here is a list of real world latex sources that are freely available on the internet The information here is sorted by application area so that it is grouped by the scientific communities that use similar notation and LaTeX constructs General examples Tutorial examples books and real world uses of LaTeX e small2e tex and sample2e tex The offic
114. The third etc ldots 110 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING end list_type All three of these types of lists can have multiple paragraphs per item just type the additional paragraphs in the normal way with a blank line between each So long as they are still contained within the enclosing environment they will automatically be indented to follow underneath their item Itemize This environment is for your standard bulleted list of items e The first item begin itemize e The second item item The first item item The second item e The third etc item The third etc ldots end itemize Enumerate The enumerate environment is for ordered lists where by default each item is num bered sequentially 1 The first item begin enumerate 2 The second item item The first item item The second item 3 The third etc item The third etc ldots end enumerate Description The description environment is slightly different You can specify the item label by passing it as an optional argument although optional it would look odd if you didn t include it Ideal for a series of definitions such as a glossary Compacted lists using mdwlist As you may have noticed in standard LaTeX document classes the vertical spac ing between items and above and below the lists as a whole is more than between LIST STRUCTURES 111 First The first item begin description Second The second item item First The first item item Seco
115. X Live Ubuntu and Debian users can install one not both of these systems using the system s apt package manager Mac OS X Mac OS X users may use the MacTeX supporting TeX LaTeX AMSTeX ConTeXt XeTeX and many other core packages Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows users can install MiKTeX onto their computer This distribution has advanced features such as automatic installation of packages and simple interfaces to modify settings such as default paper sizes 281 282 APPENDIX A INSTALLATION Editors TeX and LaTeX source documents as well as related files are all text files and can be opened and modified in almost any text editor A few recommended editors include Cross platform e Texmaker e Vim Linux only e Kile Mac OS X only e TeXShop Windows only e LEd e TeXnicCenter e WinEdt e WinShell Bibliography management Bibliography files bib are most easily edited and modified using a management system These graphical user interfaces all feature a database form where information is entered for each reference item and the resulting text file can be used directly by BibTeX Cross platform e JabRef Mac OS X only e BibDesk GRAPHICS TOOLS 283 Graphics tools Xfig Xfig is a basic program that can produce vector graphics which can be exported to PSTEX It can be installed on UNIX Linux platforms With Ubuntu or Debian distributions it can be easily installed using apt On Microsoft Windows s
116. X source Y Modelling m s IL IL IL Y Enrichment o Author Claudia Aragao and Luis E Conceicao and Maria Teresa Dinis and Hans Jorgen Fyhn Y Water quality Y Resting eggs x Kyb Title Amino acid pools of rotifers and Artemia under different conditions nutritional implications for fish larvae DHA Artemia Modelling Y DEB Journal Aquaculture xj Y Assimilation Manage Ciliates xj Toggle abbreviation Settings VA x Year 2004 Volume 234 Pages 429 445 V Bibtexkey laragao04 Status BibTeX key is unique Figure 7 4 JabRef e Citavi A free software which even searches libraries for citations and keeps all your knowledge in a database Export of the database to all kinds of formats is possible Works together with MS Word and Open Office Writer Moreover plug ins for browsers and Arcobat Reader exist to automatically include references to your project e JabRef is a small Java program which lets you edit your BibTeX and other bibliographic databases easily letting you mostly forget about the details e bibliographer Bibliographer is a BibTeX bibliography database editor which aims to be easy to use Its features include linking files to your records with indexing and searching support The interface is designed for the easy navigation of your bibliography and double clicking a record will open the linked file 56 CHAPTER 7 BIBLIOGRAPHY MANAGEMENT
117. a vartheta phi varphi omega a 3 7 1 9 9 0 p o T O 8 2 Gamma Theta Phi Omega 1 Set letters Set letters are commonly used in Maths to name special sets like the set of natural numbers To create one just type mathbb letter and put the letter in the brackets using the amssymb package It works only with capitals NE mathbb N mathbb Z mathbb Q mathbb R mathbb Cc N Z Q R C M If you prefer bold letters so choose Wnathbf letter NE mathbf N mathbf Z mathbf Q mathbf R mathbf C N Z Q R C M Note that you cannot bold greek letter using mathbf The bm package defines the bm command which can do this Fractions To create a fraction you must use the frac numerator denominator command For those who need their memories refreshed that s the top and bottom respectively 132 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS You can also embed fractions within fractions as shown in the examples below Mrac xtyHy z y s frac frac i x frac i y y z It is also possible to produce a simple fraction of the form using the command x y Powers and indices Powers and indices are mathematically equivalent to superscripts and subscripts in normal text mode The carat character is used to raise something and the under score _ is for lowering How to use them is best shown by example Power Index x n x n i Ni x Nn x ndij nij
118. a description on how to do it Any possible output can be expressed in terms of the following structures Do not use the environments introduced in the plain LaTeX section they have a different management of spaces before and after the formula so you d better use only amsmath environments for consistency Moreover amsmath prevents overlapping of the equation numbers with wide formula while plain LaTeX does not One centered formula without any label When you just want to show a formula without referencing it later use the equation environment Here is an example begin fequation ax2 tbxt c 0 end equation ax br c 0 One centered formula with label When you just want to show a formula and you want to reference it later use the equation environment Here is an example 142 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS begin equation ax2t tbx c 0 end equation br c 0 1 Several centered formulas without label When you want to show several centered formulas without referencing them later use gather It can be useful if you want to show the steps leading to a conclusion begin gather 0 2 0 3 0 2 0 end gather 6 0 ax br c 0 ax bx 0 Several centered formulas one label for all of them When you want to show several formulas on different lines but you want to reference all of them just with one number then you have to
119. a hyperlink For example the command autoref sec intro would create a hyperlink to the label sec intro command wherever it is Assuming that this label is pointing to a section the hyperlink would contain the text section 3 4 or similar capitalization rules will be followed which makes this very convenient 162 CHAPTER 15 LABELS AND CROSS REFERENCING You can customize the prefixed text by redefining type autorefname to the prefix you want as in def subsectionautorefname section If you would like a hyperlink reference but do not want the predefined text that autoref provides you can do this with a command such as hyperref sec intro Appendix ref sec intro Note that you can disable the creation of hyperlinks in hyperref and just use these commands for automatic text The hyperref package also automatically includes the nameref package and sim ilarly named command It is similar to autoref but inserts text corresponding to the section name for example The hyperref package and phantomsection When you define a label outside a figure a table or other floating objects the label points to the current section In some case this behavior is not what you d like and you d prefer the generated link to point to the line where the Mabel is defined This can be achieved with the command phantomsection as in this example The link location will be placed on the line below phantomsection Mabel
120. acing in the whole document use the command linespread covered in LaTeX Customizing LaTeX Spacing To change line spacing in specific environments do the following 1 Add usepackage setspace to the document preamble 2 This then provides the following environments to use within your document e doublespace all lines are double spaced e onehalfspace line spacing set to one and half spacing e singlespace normal line spacing Special Paragraphs For those of you who have read most all of the tutorials so far you will have already come across some of the following paragraph formats Although seen before it makes sense to re introduce here for the sake of completeness SPECIAL PARAGRAPHS 107 Verbatim Text There are several ways to introduce text that won t be interpreted by the compiler If you use the verbatim environment everything input between the begin and end commands are processed as if by a typewriter All spaces and new lines are reproduced as given and the text is displayed in an appropriate fixed width font Any LaTeX command will be ignored and handled as plain text Ideal for typesetting program source code This environment was used in an example in the previous tutorial Here is an example beginverbatim The verbatim environment simply reproduces every character you input including all spaces The verbatim environment simply reproduces every character you input including all spaces Vend
121. added but not if these files have been modified the users have to update their file name data base FNDB before they can use these 240 CHAPTER 31 COLLABORATIVE WRITING OF LATEX DOCUMENTS Repository Browser C branches i7 D3tags trunk bibtex EStex latex x URL svn svnAgrarKiel dyndns org tex Checkout View Close agrarpol bib 808 25 17 24 tex File name V Revision Last updated Figure 31 1 Common texmf tree shown in eSvn s Repository Browser classes and styles For instance teTeX users have to execute texhash MiKTeX users have to click on the button Refresh FNDB in the General tab of the MiKTeX Options Furthermore the repository contains manuals explaining the specific LaTeX soft ware solution at our department e g this document The Subversion server hosts a separate repository for each project of our depart ment Although branching merging and tagging is less important for writing text documents than for writing source code for software our repository layouts follow the recommendations of the Subversion book http svnbook red bean com In this sense each repository has the three directories trunk branches and tags The most important directory is trunk If a single text document belongs to the project all files and subdirectories of this text document are in trunk If the project yields two or more different tex
122. age textwidth or the THE GRAPHICX PACKAGE 79 includegraphics scale 0 5 chick includegraphics width 2 5cm chick height of the text on a page textheight pictures not shown includegraphics width 0 5 linewidth chick includegraphics width 0 75 textwidth chick includegraphics height 0 75 textheight chick To rotate I also scaled the image down 80 CHAPTER 9 IMPORTING GRAPHICS includegraphics scale 0 5 angle 180 chick And finally an example of how to crop an image should you wish to focus in one particular area of interest includegraphics trim 10mm 80mm 20mm 5mm clip width 3cm chick Note the presence of clip as the trim operation will not work without it As you may have noticed the file name of the picture is always without the exten sions the format of the picture does not matter LaTeX will take care of getting the right version for us Consider the following situation you have added some pictures to your document in JPG and you have successfully compiled it in PDF Now you want to compile it in DVI you run latex and you get a lot of errors because you forgot to provide the EPS versions of the pictures you want to insert At the beginning of this book we have stated that the same LaTeX source can be compiled in both DVI and PDF without any change This is true as long as you don t use particular packages and graphicx is one of those In any case you can stil
123. ake reasonably prudent steps when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy directly or through your agents or retailers of that edition to the public It is requested but not required that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document 4 MODIFICATIONS You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the condi tions of sections 2 and 3 above provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it In addition you must do these things in the Modified Version A Use in the Title Page and on the covers if any a title distinct from that of the Document and from those of previous versions which should if there were any be listed in the History section of the Document You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission B List on the Title Page as authors one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version together with at least fi
124. akoleva Spag85 Spelemann Stephan Schneider SteveM82 Thefrankinator Towsonu2003 Tuka Tully Unco Urhixidur Vadik wiki Vesal Webinn Whiteknight Withinfocus Wknight8111 Yez Ysnikraz and anony mous contributors Appendix G GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 2 November 2002 Copyright 2000 2001 2002 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin St Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The purpose of this License is to make a manual textbook or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it with or without modifying it either commercially or noncommercially Secondarily this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work while not being considered responsible for modifi cations made by others This License is a kind of copyleft which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense It complements the GNU General Public License which is a copyleft license designed for free software We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software because free software needs free documentation a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does But this Lice
125. ame model color spec e name is the name of the color you can call it as you like e model is the way you describe the color e color spec is the description of the color The models you can use to describe the color are the following 189 190 CHAPTER 21 COLOR PACKAGE model description color spec example gray you can only define just one number between definecolor light shades of gray 0 black and 1 white gray gray 0 95 so 0 95 will be very light gray 0 30 will be dark gray rgb you refer to the three number given in the definecolor orange Red Green Blue form red green blue the rgb 1 0 5 0 model quantity of each color is represented with a num ber between 0 and 1 cmyk you refer to the four numbers definecolor orange Cyan Magenta given in the form cmyk 0 0 5 1 0 Yellow black cyan magenta yellow black model The simplest way to type colored text is by textcolor declared color text where declared color is a color that was defined before by definecolor Another possible way is by color declared color that will switch the standard text color to the color you want It will work until the end of the current TeX group For example this is standard black text color red this will look red and this will look black again The difference between textcolor and color is the same difference between texttt and ttfamily you can use t
126. an and how to type accents and symbols if you use them 11 e how to create open save close rename move and delete files and folders directories e how to use a Web browser and or File Transfer Protocol FTP program to download and save files from the Internet e how to uncompress and unwrap unzip or detar downloaded files If you don t know how to do these things yet it s important to go and learn them first Trying to become familiar with the fundamentals of using a computer at the same time as learning LaTeX is not likely to be as effective as doing them in order These are not specialist skills they are all included in the European Computer Driving Licence ECDL and the relevant sections of the ECDL syllabus are noted in the square brackets above so they are well within the capability of anyone who uses a computer Prerequisites At a minimum you ll need the following programs to edit LaTeX e An editor You can use a basic text editor like notepad but a dedicated LaTeX editor will be more useful On Windows TeXnicCenter http www texniccenter org is a popu lar free and open source LaTeX editor On Unix like including Mac OS X systems Emacsen and gvim provide powerful TeX enviroments for the tech savvy while Texmaker http www xmimath net texmaker index html and Kile http kile sf net pro vide more user friendly development environments e The LaTeX binaries and style sheets e g MiKT
127. an integral to be in roman font and a small space away from the rest If you want to type an integral like int x V mathrm d x you can define a command like this newcommand dd mathrm d in the preamble of your document We have chosen dd just because it reminds the d it replaces and it is fast to type Doing so the code for your integral becomes int x dd x Now whenever you write an integral you just have to use the dd instead of the d and all your integrals will have the same style If you change your mind you just have to change the definition in the preamble and all your integrals will be changed accordingly Argmax and argmin LaTeX has no built in argmax command to typeset argmax Some people get around this by using arg max This could be undesirable because a subscripted variable will appear centered beneath the word max instead of centered beneath the whole word The following command can be used to correctly display the argmax operator argmax underset x operatorname arg max Another way is to define the command arg max newcommand argmax operatornamewithlimits arg max Advanced Mathematics AMS Math package The AMS American Mathematical Society mathematics package is a powerful pack age that creates an higher layer of abstraction over mathematical LaTeX language if you use it it will make your life easier Some commands amsmath introduces will make other plai
128. and produces dots in a way that will not upset 4 the typesetting of the document Note that the 4 sign tells latex that whatever following it is 4 a comment that should not be included in the compiled document That said allow me to reiterate that your material will be used to the noble end of providing a free collection of knowledge for everyone naturally enough only if you agree If that is the case could you kindly fill in the attached form and post it back to me We shall greatly appreciate it Thank you for your time and consideration I look forward to your reply closing Yours Faithfully ps P S You can find the full text of GFDL license at http www gnu org copyleft fdl html encl Copyright permission form end letter end document Envelopes Here is a relatively simple envelope which uses the geometry package which is used because it vastly simplifies the task of rearranging things on the page and the page itself 4 envelope tex documentclass letter usepackage margin 0 15in papersize 4 125in 9 5in landscape twoside false geometry setlength parskip 0pt pagestyle fempty begin document 176 CHAPTER 18 FROM NAME FROM STREET ADDRESS FROM CITY STATE ZIP vspace 1 Oin large setlength parindent 3 6in TO NAME TO STREET ADDRESS TO CITY STATE ZIP LETTERS end document FROM NAME FROM STREET ADDRESS FROM CITY STATE ZIP l O NAME l O STREET AD
129. ascal VRML Gnuplot Perl XML Haskell PHP XSLT HTML PL I For some of them several dialects are supported For more information refer to the documentation that comes with the package it should be within your distribution under the name listings dvi Notes 1 It supports Mathematica code only if you are typing in plain text format You can t include NB files lstinputlisting as you could with any other programming language but Mathematica can export in a pretty formatted LaTeX source you can modify several parameters that will affect how the code is shown You can put the following code anywhere in the document it doesn t matter whether before or after begin document change it according to your needs The meaning is explained next to any line Mstset 7 language Octave choose the language of the code basicstyle footnotesize 4 the size of the fonts that are used for the code numbers left 4 where to put the line numbers numberstyle Mfootnotesize the size of the fonts that are used for the line numbers stepnumber 2 4 the step between two line numbers If it s 1 each line will be numbered numbersep 5pt how far the line numbers are from the code backgroundcolor color white choose the background color You must add usepackage color Showspaces false Show spaces adding particular underscores Showstringspaces false 4 underline spaces within strings showtabs false show tabs with
130. ass then you can simply pass the optional argument twocolumn to the document class documentclass twocolumn article which will give the desired effect While this simple addition will do the job 9 out of 10 times it is widely acknowl edged that there are many limitations of this approach and that the multicol package is much more useful for handling multiple columns It has several advantages e Can support up to ten columns e Implements a multicol environment therefore it is possible to mix the number of columns within a document e Additionally the environment can be nested inside other environments such as figure e Multicol outputs balanced columns whereby the columns on the final page will be of roughly equal length e Vertical rules between columns can be customised e Column environments can be easily customised locally or globally MANUAL PAGE FORMATTING 127 Floats are not fully supported by this environment It can only cope if you use the starred forms of the float commands e g begin figure which makes the float span all columns This is not hugely problematic since floats of the same width as a column may be too small and you would probably want to span them anyway To create a typical two column layout begin multicols 2 lots of text ldots end multicols The parameter columnseprule holds the width of the vertical rules By default the lines are omitted as this parameter is set to a le
131. ave to use the pdftex option otherwise you will get an error if you use the hypersetup command your code will be clearer and more readable even if the effect is exactly the same Here is a list of the possible variables you can change for the complete list see the official documentation The default values are written in an upright font variable values comment bookmarks true false show or hide the bookmarks bar when displaying the document unicode false true allows to use characters of non Latin based languages in Acrobat s bookmarks pdfborder text set the style of the border around a link e g 0 0 0 gives no border pdftoolbar true false show or hide Acrobat s toolbar pdfmenubar true false show or hide Acrobat s menu pdffitwindow true false adjust the initial magnification of the PDF when dis played pdftitle text define the title that gets displayed in the Document Info window of Acrobat pdfauthor text the name of the PDF s author it works like the one above pdfsubject text subject of the document it works like the one above pdfnewwindow true false define if a new window should get opened when a link leads out of the current document pdfkeywords text list of keywords colorlinks false true surround the links by color frames false or colors the text of the links true The color of these links can be configure
132. bTeX that tell it how to format the information stored in the bib file when processed for output And so the first com mand listed above is declaring which style file to use The style file in this instance is plain bst which comes as standard with BibTeX You do not need to add the bst extension when using this command as it is assumed Despite its name the plain style does a pretty good job look at the output of this tutorial to see what I mean The second command is the one that actually specifies the bib file you wish to use The one I created for this tutorial was called sample bib but once again you don t in clude the file extension At the moment the bib file is in the same directory as the La TeX document too However if your bib file was elsewhere which makes sense if you intend to maintain a centralized database of references for all your research you need to specify the path as well e g bibliography HOME some where sample bib Now that LaTeX and BibTeX know where to look for the appropriate files actually citing the references is fairly trivial The cite ref_key is the command you need making sure that the ref key corresponds exactly to one of the entries in the bib BIBTEX 51 file If you wish to cite more that one reference at the same time do the following cite ref_key1 ref key2 ref keyN Why won t LaTeX generate any output The addition of BibTeX adds extra complexity for the processing of
133. be used for previewing on the monitor You can specify which image file is to be used by pdflatex through the preamble command MDeclareGraphicsExtensions pdf png jpg which specified the hierarchy of files to include in the document if they exist and have the same prefix T8 CHAPTER 9 IMPORTING GRAPHICS Including graphics After we have seen which formats we can include and how we could manage those formats now it s time to learn how to include them in our document After you have loaded the graphicx package in your preamble you can include images with includegraphics whose syntax is the following Mincludegraphics attri vali attr2 val2 attrn valn imagename As you should hopefully be aware by now arguments in square brackets are op tional whereas curly braces are compulsory The argument of the curly braces is the name of the image write it without the extension This way the LaTeX compiler will look for any supported image format in that directory and will take the best one EPS if the output is DVI JPEG PNG or PDF if the output is PDF The variety of possible attributes that can be set is fairly large and so I shall cover the most useful width xx Specify the preferred width of the im NB Only specifying either ported image to width or height will scale the image whilst maintain ing the aspect ratio height xx Specify the preferred height of the im ported image to keepaspectra
134. break after the slash mark if needed The use of the character in LaTeX should be restricted to units such as mm year which should not be broken over multiple lines TEXT FORMATTING 99 Emphasizing Text In order to add some emphasis to a word or phrase the simplest way is to use the emph text command That s it See dead easy want to emph emphasize a word I want to emphasize a word Font Styles and size I will really only scratch the surface about this particular field This section is not about how to get your text in Verdana size 12pt There are three main font families roman such as Times sans serif eg Arial and monospace eg Courier You can also specify styles such as italic and bold The following table lists the commands you will need to access the typical font styles LaTeX command Equivalent to Output style Remarks textnormal normalfont document font family this is the default or nor mal font emph em emphasis typically italics textrm rmfamily roman font family textsf sffamily sans serif font family texttt ttfamily teletypefont family this is a fixed width or monospace font textup upshape upright shape the same as the normal typeface textit itshape italic shape textsl slshape slanted shape a skewed version of the normal typeface similar
135. c Mac applemac macukr Unix latini koi8 ru Windows ansinew 1251 DOS 05 2 850 cp866nav If you have a multilingual document with conflicting input encodings you might want to switch to unicode using the ucs package usepackage ucs usepackage utf8x inputenc will enable you to create LaTeX input files in utf8x a multi byte encoding in which each character can be encoded in as little as one byte and as many as four bytes Font encoding is a different matter It defines at which position inside a TeX font each letter is stored Multiple input encodings could be mapped into one font encoding which reduces number of required font sets Font encodings are handled through fontenc package usepackage encoding fontenc where encoding is font encoding It is possible to load several encodings simulta neously The default LaTeX font encoding is OT1 the encoding of the original Computer Modern TeX font It contains only the 128 characters of the 7 bit ASCII character set When accented characters are required TeX creates them by combining a normal character with an accent While the resulting output looks perfect this approach stops the automatic hyphenation from working inside words containing accented characters Besides some of Latin letters could not be created by combining a normal character with an accent to say nothing about letters of non Latin alphabets such as Greek or Cyrillic To overcome these short
136. ce babel will still work but will disable hyphenation which has quite a negative effect on the appearance of the typeset document Babel also specifies new commands for some languages which simplify the input of special characters See the sections about languages for more information If you call babel with multiple languages usepackage languageA languageB babel then the last language in the option list will be active i e languageB you can to use the command selectlanguage languageA to change the active language 265 266 CHAPTER 35 INTERNATIONALIZATION Most of the modern computer systems allow you to input letter of national alpha bets directly from the keyboard In order to handle variety of input encoding used for different groups of languages and or on different computer platforms LaTeX employs the inputenc package usepackage encoding inputenc When using this package you should consider that other people might not be able to display your input files on their computer because they use a different encoding For example the German umlaut on OS 2 is encoded as 132 on Unix systems using ISO LATIN 1 it is encoded as 228 while in Cyrillic encoding cp1251 for Windows this letter does not exist at all therefore you should use this feature with care The following encodings may come in handy depending on the type of system you are working on Operating system Encodings Western Latin Cyrilli
137. ch an output is by the natbib package In fact it can supersede LaTeX s own citation commands as Natbib allows the user to easily switch between Harvard or numeric The first job is to add the following to your preamble in order to get LaTeX to use the Natbib package usepackage natbib Citation command Output citet goossens93 Goossens et al 1993 citep goossens93 Goossens et al 1993 citet goossens93 Goossens Mittlebach and Samarin 1993 citep goossens93 Goossens Mittlebach and Samarin 1993 citeauthor goossens93 Goossens et al citeauthor goossens93 Goossens Mittlebach and Samarin citeyear goossens93 1993 citeyearpar goossens93 1993 Table 7 1 Natbib commands Also you need to change the bibliography style file to be used so edit the appro priate line at the bottom of the file so that it reads bibliographystyle plainnat 58 CHAPTER 7 BIBLIOGRAPHY MANAGEMENT Once done it is basically a matter of altering the existing cite commands to display the type of citation you want The main commands simply add a for textual or p for parenthesized to the basic cite command You will also notice how Natbib by default will compress references with three or more authors to the more concise 1st surname et al version By adding an asterisk you can override this default and list all authors associated with that citation There are some other less commo
138. comings several 8 bit CM like font sets were created Es tended Cork EC fonts in T1 encoding contains letters and punctuation characters for most of the European languages based on Latin script The LH font set contains letters necessary to typeset documents in languages using Cyrillic script Because of ARABIC SCRIPT 267 the large number of Cyrillic glyphs they are arranged into four font encodings T2A T2B T2C and X2 The CB bundle contains fonts in LGR encoding for the com position of Greek text By using these fonts you can improve enable hyphenation in non English documents Another advantage of using new CM like fonts is that they provide fonts of CM families in all weights shapes and optically scaled font sizes Here is a collection of suggestions about writing a LaTeX document in a language other than English If you have experience in a language not listed below please add some notes about it Arabic script For languages which use the Arabic script including Arabic Persian Urdu Pashto Kurdish Uyghur etc add the following code to your preamble usepackagefarabtex You can input text in either romanized characters or native Arabic script encodings Use any of the following commands environment to enter in text NS gus gt RL begin farabtext end arabtext See the Arab TeX Wikipedia article for further details Cyrillic script See also the Bulgarian translation of the Not so Short Introduct
139. contain the supplied text Text within this box cannot be broken across lines Let s see what happens when the above equation code is adapted 50apples x 100apples lots of apples The text looks better However there are no gaps between the numbers and the words Unfortunately you are required to explicitly add these There are many ways to add spaces between maths elements however for the sake of simplicity I find it easier in this instance at least just to literally add the space character in the affected mbox s itself just before the text NE 50 mbox apples times 100 mbox apples mbox lots of apples 2 50 apples x 100 apples lots of apples BASIC MATHEMATICS PLAIN LATEX 135 Formatted text Using the mbox is fine and gets the basic result Yet there is an alternative that offers a little more flexibility You may recall the introduction of font formatting commands such as textrm textit textbf etc These commands format the argument accordingly e g textbf bold text gives bold text These commands are equally valid within a maths environment to include text The added benefit here is that you can have better control over the font formatting rather than the standard text achieved with mbox begin equation 50 textrm apples times 100 textbf apples textit lots of apples 2 end equation 50 apples x 100 apples lots of apples However as is the case with Latex there is mo
140. d All users edit our bibliographic data base with the graphical BibTeX editor Jab Ref http jabref sourceforge net As JabHef is written in Java it runs on all major operating systems As different versions of JabRef generally save files in a slightly different way e g by introducing line breaks at different positions all users should use the same e g last stable version of JabRef Otherwise there would be many differences between different versions of bib files that solely originate from using different version of JabRef Hence it would be hard to find the real differences between the compared documents Furthermore the probability of conflicts would be much higher see section Subversion really makes the difference As Jab Ref saves the BibTeX data base with the native newline character of the author s operating system it is recommended to add the Subversion property svn eol style and set it to native see section Subversion really makes the difference JabRef preferences 2 General Entry type Key pattern Groups Appearance Default pattern auth lower shortyear Default External programs Entry table Entry table columns 7 Reset all eyp Entry preview Name formatter XMP metadata Generate keys for imported entries Key generator settings Advanced Warn before overwriting existing keys Generate keys before saving for ent
141. d begin algorithmic can be given the optional argument of a positive integer which if given will cause line numbering to occur at multiples of that integer E g begin algorithmic 5 will enter the algorithmic environment and number every fifth line Below is an example of typesetting a basic algorithm using the algorithmic pack age remember to add the usepackage algorithmic statement to your document preamble begin falgorithmic IF i geq maxval STATE iNgets 0 ELSE IF i k leq maxval STATE i gets itk ENDIF ENDIF end algorithmic The LaTeX source can be written to a format familiar to programmers so that it is easy to read This will not however affect the final layout in the document There are several constructs provided by algorithmic detailed below 167 168 CHAPTER 17 ALGORITHMS AND PSEUDOCODE Single line statements STATE text A simple statement e g for setting a variable begin algorithmic STATE i 0 end algorithmic would produce i 0 If statements There are three forms of this construct MF condition lt text gt ENDIF IF lt condition gt lt text gt ELSE lt text gt ENDIF MF condition lt text gt ELSIF lt condition gt lt text gt ELSE lt text gt ENDIF The third form accepts as many ELSIF clauses as required For loops There are two forms FOR lt condition gt lt text gt ENDFOR FORALL lt condition gt lt text gt ENDFOR A traditional
142. d they are aimed for different types of quotations All of them are indented on either margin and you will need to add your own quotation marks if you want them The provided environments are quote for a short quotation or a series of small quotes separated by blank lines quotation for use with longer quotes of more than one paragraph because it indents the first line of each paragraph verse is for quotations where line breaks are important such as poetry Once in new stanzas are created with a blank line and new lines within a stanza are indicated using the newline command If a line takes up more than one line on the page then all subsequent lines are indented until explicitly separated with Abstracts In scientific publications it is customary to start with an abstract which gives the reader a quick overview of what to expect LaTeX provides the abstract environment for this purpose It is available in article and report document classes it s not available in the book but it s quite simple to create your own if you really need it List Structures Lists often appear in documents especially academic as their purpose is often to present information in a clear and concise fashion List structures in Latex are sim ply environments which essentially come in three flavors itemize enumerate and description All lists follow the basic format begin list_type item The first item item The second item item
143. d are for use within other environments For example p paragraph columns in tabular 106 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING Alignment Environment Command Left justified flushleft raggedright Right justified flushright raggedleft Center center centering Paragraph Indents Paragraph indents are normally fine The size of the indent is determined by a pa rameter called parindent The default length that this constant holds is set by the document class that you use It is possible to override using the setlength command setlength parindent length will reset the indent to length Be careful however if you decide to set the indent to zero then it means you will need a vertical space between paragraphs in order to make them clear The space between paragraphs is held in parskip which could be altered in a similar fashion as above However this parameter is used elsewhere too such as in lists which means you run the risk of making various parts of your document look very untidy that is even more untidy than this type of paragraph style It may be better to use a document class typeset for this style of indentation such as artikel3 cls written by a dutch person translates to article3 To indent all the lines of a paragraph other than just the first line use the TeX command hangindent An example follows hangindent 0 7cm This paragraph has an extra indentation at the left Line Spacing To change line sp
144. d happen if you used the standard bracket characters As you can see they would be fine for a simple equation that remained on a single line e g 3 2 x 10 3 35 but not for equations that have greater vertical size such as those using fractions The second example illustrates the LaTeX way of coping with this problem The left and right commands provide the means for automatic sizing of brackets curly braces or absolute value symbols You must enclose the expression that you want in brackets or absolute values with these commands The after the command should be replaced with the style of bracket desired A problem happens if you want to split the equation across multiple lines as the right bracket can only be used if there is a remaining open left bracket on the current line though the types do not need to match If you need to force a right bracket you can make an invisible left bracket and a full stop left Alternatively check out the nath package which provides auto scaling delimiters Arrays Using the array environment you can create table like structures in math mode The array environment is basically equivalent to the tabular environment For example if you want to create a matrix Latex by default doesn t have a specific command to use but you can create a similar structure using array You can use the array to arrange and align your data as you want and then enclose it with appropriate left and right bracke
145. d using the following options default colors are shown linkcolor red color of internal links sections pages etc citecolor green color of citation links bibliography filecolor magenta color of file links urlcolor cyan color of URL links mail web In order to speed up your customization process here is a list with the variables with their default value Copy it in your document and make the changes you want Next to the variables there is a short explanations of their meaning hypersetup bookmarks true unicode false show bookmarks bar 4 non Latin characters in Acrobat s bookmarks 194 CHAPTER 22 HYPERREF PACKAGE pdftoolbar true 4 show Acrobat s toolbar pdfmenubar true 4 show Acrobat s menu pdffitwindow true page fit to window when opened pdftitle My title title pdfauthor Author author pdfsubject Subject 7 subject of the document pdfnewwindow true 4 links in new window pdfkeywords keywords list of keywords colorlinks false false boxed links true colored links linkcolor red 4 color of internal links citecolor green color of links to bibliography filecolor magenta color of file links urlcolor cyan color of external links If you don t need such a high customization here are some smaller but useful examples When creating PDFs destined for printing colored links are not a good thing as they end up in gray in the final output making it difficult to r
146. de report begin document title How to Structure a LaTeX Document author Andrew Roberts date December 2004 maketitle end document THE DOCUMENT ENVIRONMENT 29 The title author and date commands are self explanatory You put the title author name and date in curly braces after the relevant command The title and author are usually compulsory at least if you want LaTeX to write the title automatically if you omit the date command LaTeX uses today s date by default You always finish the top matter with the maketitle command which tells LATEX that it s complete and it can typeset the title according to the information you have provided and the class style you are using If you omit maketitle the titling will never be typeset unless you write your own Here is a more complicated example title How to Structure a LaTeX Document author Andrew Roberts School of Computing NN University of Leeds Leeds United Kingdom LS2 1HE texttt andyr comp leeds ac uk date today maketitle as you can see you can use commands as arguments of title and the others The double backslash is the LaTeX command for forced linebreak LaTeX normally decides by itself where to break lines and it s usually right but sometimes you need to cut a line short like here and start a new one If there are two authors separate them with the and command title Our Fun Document author
147. ding to the context it s a higher level command ldots the output is similar to the previous one but there is no automatic whitespace management it works at a lower level cdots those dots are centered relative to the height of a letter vdots vertical dots ddots diagonal dots hdotsfor n to be used in matrices it creates a row of dots span ning n columns Using those commands it is possible to create any complicated output with a simple and elegant code Here is a prac begin fequation A_ m n begin pmatrix a_ 1 1 amp a_ 1 2 amp Ncdots a 2 1 amp a_ 2 2 amp cdots vdots amp vdots amp ddots a_ m 1 amp a_ m 2 amp cdots end pmatrix end equation tical example amp a_ i n amp a_ 2 n amp Nvdots amp a_ m n 148 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS Q1 Q12 Gin Q21 Q22 Q2 Amn 1 Qm 2 Amn Integrals and sums Amsmath introduces more symbols for integrals int Jr Mint ff idint Sif Miiint idotsint Sese this way the multiple integrals will look closer than simply using int several times Moreover if you add subscripts to an integral in standard LaTeX they will look like J int a b If you want a and b to be placed on the bottom and top of those symbols this is the behavior you would expect using limits you have to load the package with intlimits intlimits amsmath this way
148. ding to the final format you can override this limit putting in the same folder pictures in different formats e g EPS and PNG with the same name and link them without writing the extension There is a simple way to solve this problem usepackage ifpdf or if you don t have this package you can add the following text just after documentclass newif ifpdf ifx pdfoutput undef ined pdffalse else ifnum pdfoutput 1 pdftrue else pdffalse fi fi this is plain TeX code The ifpdf package and this code both define a new if else you can use to change your code according to the compiler you are using After you have used this code you can use whenever you want in your document the following syntax ifpdf we are running pdflatex else we are running latex Mi place after ifpdf the code you want to insert if you are compiling with pdflatez place after else the code you want to insert if you are compiling with latex For example you can use this syntax to load different packages according to the compiler Using graphs from gnuplot A simple method to include graphs and charts in LaTeX documents is to create it within a common spreadsheet software OpenOffice Calc or MS Office Excel etc and include it in the document as a cropped screenshot However this produces poor quality rasterized images It is much better is to render or draw the graphs in some vector image editor like Inkscape or Xfig But even t
149. dly the generic version is not that clear so a couple of examples will clarify 4Redefine the first level renewcommand theenumi Roman enumi renewcommand labelenumi theenumi Redefine the second level renewcommand theenumii Alph enumii renewcommand labelenumii theenumii The method used above first explicitly changes the format used by the counter However the element that controls the label needs to be updated to reflect the change which is what the second line does Another way to achieve this result is this renewcommand labelenumi Roman enumi This simply redefines the appearance of the label which is fine providing that you do not intend to cross reference to a specific item within the list in which case the reference will be printed in the previous format This issue does not arise in the first example LIST STRUCTURES 113 Customizing Itemised Lists Itemized lists are not as complex as they do not need to count Therefore to cus tomize you simply change the labels The itemize labels are accessed via labelitemi labelitemii labelitemiii labelitemiv for the four respective levels renewcommand labelitemi textgreater The above example would set the labels for the first level to a greater than gt symbol Of course the text symbols available in Latex are not very exciting Why not use one of the ZapfDingbat symbols as described in the Symbols section Or use a mathematical symbol
150. ds pdflatex foo tex Now you may view the PDF file foo pdf Our first document Now we can create our first document We will produce the absolute bare minimum that is needed in order to get some output the well known Hello World approach will be suitable here e Open your favourite text editor If you use vim or emacs they also have syntax highlighting that will help to write your files e Reproduce the following text in your editor This is the LaTeX source OUR FIRST DOCUMENT 4 hello tex Our first LaTeX example documentclass article begin document Hello World end document e Save your file as hello tex What does it all mean 19 hello tex Our first LaTeX example The first line is a comment This is because it begins with the percent symbol when LaTeX sees this it simply ignores the rest of the line Comments are useful for humans to annotate parts of the source file For example you could put information about the author and the date or whatever you wish documentclass article This line is a command and tells LaTeX to use the article document class A document class file defines the formatting which in this case is a generic article format The handy thing is that if you want to change the ap pearance of your document substitute article for another class file that exists begin document This line is the beginning of the environment called document it alert
151. ds and environments Comments When LaTeX encounters a character while processing an input file it ignores the rest of the present line the line break and all whitespace at the beginning of the next line This can be used to write notes into the input file which will not show up in the printed version This is an stupid 4 Better instructive lt example Supercal This is an example Supercalifragilisticexpialidocious ifragilist icexpialidocious The character can also be used to split long input lines where no whitespace or line breaks are allowed Input File Structure When LaTeX processes an input file it expects it to follow a certain structure Thus every input file must start with the command documentclass This specifies what sort of document you intend to write After that you can include commands that influence the style of the whole document or you can load packages that add new features to the LaTeX system To load such a package you use the command Nusepackaget When all the setup work is done you start the body of the text with the command begin document Now you enter the text mixed with some useful LaTeX commands At the end of the document you add the 18 CHAPTER 2 ABSOLUTE BEGINNERS end document command which tells LaTeX to call it a day Anything that follows this command will be ignored by LaTeX The area between documentclass and begin document is called the preamble
152. e Most decent graphics software has the ability to save images in the EPS format extension is normally eps Here are some examples of software that can output EPS formats e Creating and converting vector graphics Commercial vector graphics software such as Adobe Illustrator Corel DRAW and FreeHand are commonly used and can read and write EPS figues However these products are limited to Windows and Mac OS plat forms Inkscape can save in vector EPS format and it can run on multiple plat forms However it cannot open EPS figures only export e Creating and converting raster only graphics to EPS GIMP has a graphical user interface and it is multi platform For command line ImageMagick convert or GraphicsMagick gm convert These two programs operate much the same way and can convert between most graphics formats imgtops A lightweight graphics utility THE GRAPHICX PACKAGE 77 e Creating publication quality vector based plots and charts Gnuplot producing scientific graphics since 1986 R statistical and scientific figures There are some tricks to be able to import other formats than EPS into your DVI document but they re very complicated On the other hand converting any image to EPS is very simple so it s not worth considering them Compiling with pdflatex If you are compiling with pdflatex to get a PDF you have a wider choice You can insert e JPG widely
153. e then I am afraid that this is it Basic tables are not too taxing but you will quickly notice that anything more advanced can take a fair bit of construction So we will start slowly and build up from there The tabular environment The tabular environment can be used to typeset beautiful tables with optional hori zontal and vertical lines LaTeX determines the width of the columns automatically The first line of the environment has the form begin tabular pos table spec the table spec argument tells LaTeX the alignment to be used in each column and the vertical lines to insert The number of columns does not need to be specified as it is inferred by looking at the number of arguments provided It is also possible to add vertical lines between the columns here The following symbols are available to describe the table columns some of them require that the package array has been loaded 1 left justified column centered column f right justified column p width paragraph column with text vertically aligned at the top m width paragraph column with text vertically aligned in the middle re quires array package b width paragraph column with text vertically aligned at the bottom re quires array package vertical line ll double vertical line 59 60 CHAPTER 8 TABLES By default if the text in a column is too wide for the page LaTeX won t auto matically wrap it Using p wid
154. e access to the file server can open the PDF file of a publication by simply clicking on JabRefs PDF icon If we send the LaTeX source code of a project to a journal publisher or some body else who has no access to our common texmf tree we do not include our entire bibliographic data base but extract the relevant entries with the Perl script aux2bib http www ctan org tex archive biblio bibtex utils bibtools aux2bib 246 CHAPTER 31 COLLABORATIVE WRITING OF LATEX DOCUMENTS Conclusion This wikibook describes a possible way to efficiently organise the collaborative prepa ration of LaTeX documents The presented solution is based on the Subversion version control system and several other software tools and LaTeX packages However there are still a few issues that can be improved First we plan that all users install the same LaTeX distribution As the TeX Live distribution http www tug org texlive is available both for Unix and MS Windows operating systems we might recommend our users to switch to this LaTeX distribution in the future Currently our users have different LaTeX distributions that provide a different selection of LaTeX packages and different versions of some packages We solve this problem by providing some packages on our common texmf tree Second we consider to simplify the solution for a common bibliographic data base Currently it is based on the version control system Subversion the graphical BibTeX edi
155. e curly braces with the command Such as Mit This is in italics em is generally preferred since this allows nesting Mtem Creates an item in list Used in list structures K Will L Mabel Used to create label which can be later referenced with ref See Labels and Cross referencing Marge Sets font size See Formatting Large Sets font size See Formatting LARGE Sets font size See Formatting LaTeX Prints LaTeX logo See Formatting LaTeXe Prints current LaTeX version logo See Formatting Idots Prints sequence of three dots See Formatting left lefteqn line linebreak Suggests LaTeX to break line in this place See Page Layout linethickness linewidth listoffigures listoftables location 296 M makebox maketitle markboth markright mathcal mathop mbox medskip multicolumn multiput N newcommand newcounter newenvironment newfont newlength APPENDIX E GLOSSARY newline Ends current line and starts a new one See Page Layout newpage Ends current page and starts a new one See Page Layout newsavebox newtheorem nocite noindent nolinebreak normalsize Sets default font size See Formatting nopagebreak Suggests LaTeX not to break page in this place See Page Layout not 297 O onecolumn opening oval overbrace overline Draws a line over the argument P pagebreak Suggests LaTeX breaking page in this place S
156. e option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation If the Document does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation 310 APPENDIX G GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE ADDENDUM How to use this License for your documents To use this License in a document you have written include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME Permission is granted to copy dis tribute and or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Doc umentation License Version 1 2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections no Front Cover Texts and no Back Cover Texts A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License If you have Invariant Sections Front Cover Texts and Back Cover Texts replace the with Texts line with this with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES with the Front Cover Texts being LIST and with the Back Cover Texts being LIST If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts or some other combination of the three merge those two alternatives to suit the situation If your document contains nontrivial examples
157. e specified symbol Here is a table of the available symbols PARAGRAPH FORMATTING 105 7 al EO w H t m b AR 23 3 TES s 3 3 S gt 2 X ON J ete t uA 107 oc oc oo Rz By w Un SO on ON _ ZO e M amp S Y k O x E i 101 102 117 124 125 164 165 177 173 180 181 d 188 189 196 197 2 212 123 163 t E E t Y N Sit N i w N ta Af D N J 3 Y WE ESS TS x2 Y 4 A S 9 tlc el N N N F3 N Hajo l bo N x bo y N N Figure 11 1 ZapfDingbats symbols Paragraph Formatting Altering the paragraph formatting is not often required especially in academic writing However it is useful to know and applications tend to be for formatting text in floats or other more exotic documents Paragraph Alignment Paragraphs in Latex are usually fully justified i e flush with both the left and right margins For whatever reason should you wish to alter the justification of a para graph there are three environments at hand and also Latex command equivalents All text between the begin and end of the specified environment will be justi fied appropriately The commands liste
158. eX http www miktex org for Windows teTeX http www tug org teTeX for Unix Linux and teTeX for Mac OS X http www rna nl tex html e A DVI viewer to view and print the final result Usually a DVI viewer is included in the editor or is available with the binary distribution A distribution of LaTeX with many packages add ins editors and viewers for Unix Linux Mac and Windows can be obtained from the TeX users group at http www tug org texlive Applications within a distribution Here are the main programs you expect to find in any La TeX distribution e tex the simplest compiler generates DVI from TeX source e pdftex generates PDF from TeX source e latex generates DVI from LaTeX source the most used one e pdflatex generates PDF from LaTeX source 12 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION e dvi2ps converts DVI to PostScript e dvipdf converts DVI to PDF e dvipdfm an improved version of dvipdf When LaTeX was created the only format it could create was DVI then the PDF support was added by pdflatex even if several people still don t use it As it is clear from this short list PDF files can be created with both pdflater and dvipdfm some think that the output of pdflater is better than the output of dvipdfm DVI is an old format and it does not support hyperlinks for example while PDF does so passing through DVI you will bring all the bad points of that format to PDF Strictly speaking you would write your document slight
159. each row The exception to this is when multicolumn and multirow are used to create cells which span multiple columns or rows Spanning in both directions simultaneously Here is a nontrivial example how to use spanning in both directions simultaneously and have the borders of the cells drawn correctly usepackage multirow begin tabular cclclclclcl1 cline 3 6 amp amp multicolumn 4 cl Primes NX cline 3 6 amp amp 2 amp 3 amp 5 amp 7 NN cline 1 6 multicolumn 1 cl multirow 2 Powers amp multicolumn i cl 504 amp 3 amp 2 amp O amp 1 amp NN cline 2 6 multicolumn 1 c amp multicolumn i cl 540 amp 2 amp 3 amp 1 amp O amp cline 1 6 multicolumn i cl multirow 2 Powers amp multicolumn i cl gcd amp 2 amp 2 amp 0 amp amp min NN cline 2 6 nulticolumn 1 c amp multicolumn i lcl lcem amp 3 amp 3 amp 1 amp 1 amp max NN cline 1 6 end tabular THE TABLE ENVIRONMENT CAPTIONING ETC 69 Primes Powers Powers The dummy command multicolumn 1 c is just used to draw verti cal borders both on the left and on the right of the cell When combined with multirow 2 it draws vertical borders that span two rows Note that we cannot just use hline to draw horizontal lines since we do not want the line to be drawn over the text that spans several rows Instead we use the command
160. ead You can use color frames which are not printed Nusepackagethyperref hypersetup colorlinks false or make links black usepackage pdftex hyperref hypersetup colorlinks citecolor black filecolor black linkcolor black urlcolor black When you just want to provide information for the Document Info section of the PDF file usepackage pdfauthor Author s name pdftitle Document Title pdftex hyperref By default URLs are printed using mono spaced fonts If you don t like it and you want them to be printed with the same style of the rest of the text you can use this urlstyle same Problems with Links Messages like the following PROBLEMS WITH BOOKMARKS 195 pdfTeX warning ext4 destination with the same identifier name page 1 has been already used duplicate ignored appear when a counter gets reinitialized for example by using the command mainmatter provided by the book document class It resets the page number counter to 1 prior to the first chapter of the book But as the preface of the book also has a page number 1 all links to page 1 would not be unique anymore hence the notice that du plicate has been ignored The counter measure consists of putting plainpages false into the hyperref options This unfortunately only helps with the page counter An even more radical solution is to use the option hypertexnames false but this will cause the page links in the index to st
161. eamble This then provides the command needed for spanning rows multirow num_rows width contents The arguments are pretty simple to deduce for the width means the contents natural width usepackage multirow begin tabular 1 1 11 hline multicolumn 3 cl Team sheet NN hline Goalkeeper amp GK amp Paul Robinson hline multirow 4 Defenders amp LB amp Lucus Radebe NN amp DC amp Michael Duberry amp DC amp Dominic Matteo amp RB amp Didier Domi hline nultirow 3 Midfielders amp MC amp David Batty NN amp MC amp Eirik Bakke amp MC amp Jody Morris hline Forward amp FW amp Jamie McMaster hline multirow 2 Strikers amp ST amp Alan Smith amp ST amp Mark Viduka hline end tabular 68 CHAPTER 8 Team sheet LB Lucus Radebe Michael Duberry Dominic Matteo Didier Domi Defenders MC David Batty Midfielders MC Eirik Bakke MC Jody Morris Jamie McMaster Strikers ST Alan Smith ss ST Mark Viduka TABLES The main thing to note when using multirow is that a blank entry must be inserted for each appropriate cell in each subsequent row to be spanned If there is no data for a cell just don t type anything but you still need the amp separating it from the next column s data The astute reader will already have deduced that for a table of n columns there must always be n 1 ampersands in
162. ed should be included in your LaTeX distribution as package_name sty For more information refer to the documentation of the single packages as described in the previous section The list is in alphabetical order amsmath it contains the advanced math extensions for LaTeX The com plete documentation should be in your LaTeX distribution the file is called amsdoc and can be dvi or pdf For more information see the chapter about Mathematics amssymb it adds new symbols in to be used in math mode amsthm it introduces the proof environment and the theoremstyle com mand For more information see the Theorems section array it extends the possibility of LaTeX to handle tables fixing some bugs and adding new features Using it you can create very com plicated and customized tables For more information see the Tables section babel it provides the internationalization of LaTeX It has to be loaded in any document and you have to give as an option the main language you are going to use in the document bm allows use of bold greek letters in math mode using the bm command This supersedes the amsbsy package boxedminipage it introduces the boxedminipage environment that works exactly like ninipage but adds a frame around it chngpage to easily change the margins of pages The syntax is changepage textheight textwidth 7 evensidemargin oddsidemargin columnsep topmargin headheight headse
163. ed to center align LaTeX environments chapter Starts a new chapter See Document Structure circle cite Used to make citations from the provided bibliography cleardoublepage clearpage Ends the current page and causes any floats to be printed See Page Layout cline Adds horizontal line in a table that spans only to a range of cells See hline and Tables chapter closing copyright makes amp copy sign See Formatting D dashbox date ddots documentclass options style Used to begin a latex document em Italicizes the text which is inside curly braces with the command Such as em This is in italics This command allows nesting Vensuremath LaTeX2e euro Prints euro amp euro symbol Requires eurosym package 294 APPENDIX E GLOSSARY F Mbox flushbottom fnsymbol footnote Creates a footnote footnotemark footnotesize Sets font size See Formatting footnotetext frac frame framebox frenchspacing G H hfill Abbreviation for hspace fill hline adds a horizontal line in a tabular environment See also cline Tables chapter hrulefill Maspace Produces horizontal space huge Sets font size See Formatting Huge Sets font size See Formatting hyphenation I include includegraphics Inserts an image Requires graphicx package includeonly indent 295 input Used to read in LaTex files Mit Italicizes the text which is insid
164. ee Page Layout pagenumbering pageref Used to reference to number of page where a previously declared Mabel is located See Floats Figures and Captions pagestyle par Starts a new paragraph paragraph Starts a new paragraph See Document Structure part Starts a new part of a book See Document Structure parbox parindent Normal paragraph indentation See Useful Measurement Macros parskip protect providecommand LaTeX2e put R raggedbottom raggedleft raggedright raisebox 298 APPENDIX E GLOSSARY ref Used to reference to number of previously declared Mabel See Labels and Cross referencing renewcommand right rm roman rule S savebox Makes a box and saves it in a named storage bin sbox The short form of savebox with no optional arguments se scriptsize Sets font size See Formatting section Starts a new section See Document Structure setcounter setlength settowidth sf shortstack signature sl slash See slash marks small Sets font size See Formatting smallskip sout Strikes out text Requires ulem package See Formatting space force ordinary space sqrt Creats a root default square but magnitude can be given as an optional pa rameter stackrel 299 subparagraph Starts a new subparagraph See Document Structure subsection Starts a new subsection See Document Structure subsubsection Starts a new sub subsection See Docume
165. eginfarray 1l 1 n 2 amp Nquad mbox if n is even n 1 2 amp Nquad mbox if n is odd end array right M n 2 if n is even fi 4 me n 1 2 if n is odd Latex has defined two commands that can be used anywhere in documents not just maths to insert some horizontal space They are quad and qquad A quad is a space equal to the current font size So if you are using an 11pt font then the space provided by quad will also be 11pt horizontally of course The qquad gives twice that amount As you can see from the code from the above example Nquads were used to add some separation between the maths and the text OK so back to the fine tuning as mentioned at the beginning of the document A good example would be displaying the simple equation for the indefinite integral of y with respect to z y dx If you were to try this you may write int y mathrm d x M fra However this doesn t give the correct result Latex doesn t respect the white space left in the code to signify that the y and the dz are independent entities Instead it lumps them altogether A quad would clearly be overkill is this situation what is needed are some small spaces to be utilized in this type of instance and that s what Latex provides Command Description Size Xs small space 3 18 of a quad medium space 4 18 of a quad 3 large space 5 18 of a quad negative space 3 18 of a quad
166. ength Wide figures in two column documents If you are writing a document using two columns i e you started your document with something like documentclass twocolumn article you might have noticed that you can t use floating elements that are wider than the width of a column using a LaTeX notation wider than 0 5 textwidth otherwise you will see the image over lapping with text If you really have to use such wide elements the only solution is to use the starred variants of the floating environments that are figure and table Those starred versions work exactly like the standard ones but they will be as wide as the page so you will get no overlapping A bad point of those environments is that they can be placed only at the top of the page or on their own page If you try to specify their position using modifiers like b or h they will be ignored To prevent the figures from being placed out of order with respect to their non starred counterparts the package fixltx2e should be used e g usepackage fixltx2e http www tex ac uk cgi bin texfaq2html label 2colfltorder CAPTIONS 93 Custom Floats If tables and figures are not adequate for your needs then you always have the option to create your own Examples of such instances could be source code examples or maps For a program float example one might therefore wish to create a float named program The package float is your friend for this
167. ent instead of the input command This way you can put all the formatting options in your root document and then input other files containing only text and very basic commands such as section etc The code will be much cleaner and more readable Another method of including a file is to use include filename However you cannot nest include statements within a file added via include whereas you can using input Note that this will also have an effect on the number of compiles you ll need to do Note that using include will force a page break whereas the input command does not Adding your own counters In LaTeX it is fairly easy to create new counters and even counters that reset automat ically when another counter is increased think subsection in a section for example With the command newcounter TheNameForTheNewCounter you create a new counter that is automatically set to zero If you want the counter to be reset to zero every time another counter is increased use newcounter TheNameForTheNewCounter TheNameOf TheOtherCounter 223 224 CHAPTER 28 ADVANCED TOPICS To increase the counter either use stepcounter TheNameForTheNewCounter or refstepcounter TheNameForTheNewCounter used for labels and cross referencing or addtocounter TheNameForTheNewCounter number here the number can also be negative For automatic reseting you need to use stepcounter The values of the counters can be easily found by f
168. er line starting with the number which refers to the line number in your document file which LaTeX was processing when the error was spotted Here s an example showing that the user mistyped the tableofcontents command Undefined control sequence 1 6 tableofcotnetns When LaTeX finds an error like this it displays the error message and pauses You must type one of the following letters to continue Some systems Emacs is one example run LaTeX with a nonstop switch turned on so it will always process through to the end of the file regardless of errors or until a limit is reached Warnings Warnings don t begin with an exclamation mark they are just comments by LaTeX about things you might want to look into such as overlong or underrun lines often 35 36 CHAPTER 5 ERRORS AND WARNINGS Key Meaning x Stop immediately and exit the program q Carry on quietly as best you can and don t bother me with any more error messages e Stop the program but re position the text in my editor at the point where you found the error This only works if you re using an editor which LaTeX can communicate with h Iry to give me more help i followed by a correction means input the correction in place of the error and carry on This is only a temporary fix to get the file processed You still have to make that correction in the editor caused by unusual hyphenations for example pages running sh
169. ernet addresses in howpublished or note fields howpublished url http www example com Note the usage of url command to ensure proper appearance of URLs Another way is to use special field url and make bibliography style recognise it url http www example com Styles provided by Natbib see below handle this field other styles can be modified using urlbst program Modifications of three standard styles plain abbrv and alpha are provided with urlbst If you need more help about URLs in bibliography visit FAQ of UK List of TeX Customizing bibliography appearance In my mind one of the main advantages of BibTeX especially for people who write many research papers is the ability to customize your bibliography to suit the require ments of a given publication You will notice how different publications tend to have their own style of formatting references which authors must adhere to if they want their manuscript published In fact established journals and conference organizers of ten will have created their own bibliography style bst file for those users of BibTeX to do all the hard work for you It can achieve this because of the nature of the bib database where all the in formation about your references is stored in a structured format but nothing about style This is a common theme in LaTeX in general where it tries as much as possible to keep content and presentation separate as it should be A biblio
170. es thinlines and thicklines apply to oblique line segments as well as to circles and ovals 214 CHAPTER 27 PRODUCING MATHEMATICAL GRAPHICS setlength unitlength 0 75cm begin picture 6 4 linethickness 0 075mm multiput 0 0 1 0 7 line 0 1 4 multiput 0 0 0 1 5 line 1 0 6 thicklines put 2 3 Noval 3 1 8 thinlines put 3 2 oval 3 1 8 thicklines put 2 1 Nova1 3 1 8 t1 put 4 1 1 3 1 8 b put 4 3 Noval 3 1 8 r put 3 1 5 1 1 8 0 4 end picture Multiple Use of Predefined Picture Boxes A picture box can be declared by the command newsavebox name then defined by savebox name width height position content and finally arbitrarily often be drawn by Nput x y usebox name The optional position parameter has the effect of defining the anchor point of the savebox In the example it is set to bl which puts the anchor point into the bottom left corner of the savebox The other position specifiers are top and right The name argument refers to a LaTeX storage bin and therefore is of a command nature which accounts for the backslashes in the current example Boxed pictures can be nested In this example foldera is used within the definition of folderb The oval command had to be used as the line command does not work if the segment length is less than about 3 mm THE PICTURE ENVIRON
171. es work in exactly the same way as tableofcontents to automatically list all your tables and figures If you use them they normally go after the tableofcontents command The tableofcontents command normally shows only numbered section headings and only down to the level defined by the tocdepth counter but you can add extra entries with the addcontentsline command For example if you use an unnumbered section heading command to start a preliminary piece of text like a Foreword or Preface you can write subsection Preface addcontentsline toc subsection Preface This will format an unnumbered ToC entry for Preface in the subsection style You can use the same mechanism to add lines to the List of Figures or List of Tables by substituting lof or lot for toc Depth The default ToC will list headings of level 3 and above To change how deep the table of contents displays automatically the following command can be used in the preamble setcounter tocdepth 4 This will make the table of contents include everything down to paragraphs The levels are defined above on this page The Bibliography Any good research paper will have a whole list of references Fortunately LaTeX has a slightly more intelligent approach to managing your references than the average word processor where everything has to be input manually unless you purchase a 3rd party add on There are two ways to insert your references into LaTeX e you can
172. ewcommand wbalTwo 2 This is the Wikibook about LaTeX supported by 1 2 in the document body begin itemize item wbalsup Wikimedia item wbalsup lots of users item wbalTwo John Doe end itemize e This is the Wikibook about LaTeX supported by Wikimedia e This is the Wikibook about LaTeX supported by lots of users e This is the Wikibook about LaTeX supported by John Doe LaTeX will not allow you to create a new command that would overwrite an existing one But there is a special command in case you explicitly want this renewcommand It uses the same syntax as the newcommand command In certain cases you might also want to use the providecommand command It works like newcommand but if the command is already defined LaTeX will silently ignore it With LaTex2e it is also possible to add a default parameter to a command with the following syntax newcommand name num default definition If the de fault parameter of newcommand is present then the first of the number of arguments specified by num is optional with a default value of default if absent then all of the arguments are required newcommand wbalTwo 2 Wikimedia This is the Wikibook about LaTeX supported by 1 and 2 in the document body begin itemize item wbalTwo John Doe item NwbalTwo a lots of users John Doe end itemize e This is the Wikibook about LaTeX supported by Wikimedia and John Doe e This is the Wikibo
173. example taken from the manual official manual p 7 begin algorithm enter the algorithm environment caption Calculate y x n give the algorithm a caption label algi and a label for ref commands later in the document begin algorithmic enter the algorithmic environment REQUIRE n geq 0 vee x neq 0 ENSURE y x n STATE y Leftarrow 1 IF n 0 STATE X Leftarrow 1 x STATE N Leftarrow n ELSE STATE X Leftarrow x STATE N Leftarrow n ENDIF CODE FORMATING USING THE LISTINGS PACKAGE 171 WHILE N neq 0 IF N is even STATE X Leftarrow X times X STATE N Leftarrow N 2 ELSE N is odd STATE y Leftarrow y times X STATE N Leftarrow N 1 ENDIF ENDWHILE end algorithmic Vend algorithm More information about all possible commands available at the project page http developer berlios de docman group id 3442 The official manual is located at http developer berlios de docman display doc php docid 800 amp group id 3442 Code formating using the Listings package A complete reference manual can be found at http tug ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib listings listings pdf This is a basic example for some Pascal code documentclass article usepackage listings Include the listings package begin document lstset language Pascal Set your language you can change the language for each code block optionally
174. f the figure number put the label inside the caption to ensure correct numbering Wrapping text around figures Although not normally the case in academic writing an author may prefer that some floats do not break the flow of text but instead allow text to wrap around it Obvi ously this effect only looks decent when the figure in question is significantly narrower than the text width A word of warning Wrapping figures in LaTex will require a lot of manual ad justment of your document There are several packages available for the task but none of them work perfectly Before you make the choice of including figures with text wrapping in your document make sure you have considered all the options For example you could use a layout with two columns for your documents and have no text wrapping at all Anyway we will look at the package wrapfig To use wrapfig you must first add usepackage wrapfig to the preamble This then gives you access to begin wrapfigure lineheight alignment width Alignment can normally be either l for left or r for right Lowercase or r forces the figure to start precisely where specified and may cause it to run over page breaks while capital L or R allows the figure to float If you defined your document as twosided the alignment can also be i for inside or o for outside as well as J or O The width is obviously the width of the figure An example 90 CHAPTER 10 FLOATS FIGURES AND CAPTION
175. for loop The method of iteration is usually described in the first argument e g FOR i 1 to 10 STATE i leftarrow i 1 ENDFOR While loops WHILE lt condition gt lt text gt ENDWHILE Repeat until condition REPEAT lt text gt UNTIL lt condition gt THE ALGORITHM ENVIRONMENT 169 Infinite loops LOOP text ENDLOOP Precondition REQUIRE lt text gt Postcondition ENSURE lt text gt Returning variables RETURN lt text gt Printing variables PRINT lt text gt This is included because it is used so frequently it is considered an operation in its own right Comments COMMENT lt text gt Note that you can not use COMMENT as the first statement of any closed struc ture such as IF ENDIF FOR ENDFOR FORALL ENDFORALL WHILE ENDWHILE and begin algorithmic end algorithmic An error LaTeX Error Something s wrong perhaps a missing Mtem will be reported It does not make much sense There are two workaounds 1 Use NSTATE COMMENT lt text gt 2 Use the optional arguments in those closed structures For example WHILE lt comment text gt lt condition gt The algorithm environment It is often useful for the algorithm produced by algorithmic to be floated to the optimal point in the document to avoid it being split across pages The algorithm environment provides this and a few other useful features Include it by adding the usepackage algori
176. for the vertical No problem for LaTeX The raisebox lift extend above baseline extend below baseline text command lets you define the vertical properties of a box You can use width height depth and totalheight in the first three parameters in order to act upon the size of the box inside the text argument raisebox 0pt Opt Opt Large textbf Aaaa raisebox 0 3ex a Aaaaa he shouted but not 0 7 even the next wne in line noticed that raisebox 1 2ex r something terriblp had happened to him raisebox 2 2ex g raisebox 4 5ex h he shouted but not even the next one in line noticed that something terrible had happened to him 228 CHAPTER 28 ADVANCED TOPICS Rules and Struts The rule command in normal use produces a simple black box rule lift width height Here is an example rule 3mm 1pt rule 1mm 5mm 1cm rule 3mm 1pt rule 1mm 1cm 5mm rule 3mm 1pt This is useful for drawing vertical and horizontal lines A special case is a rule with no width but a certain height In professional type setting this is called a strut It is used to guarantee that an element on a page has a certain minimal height You could use it in a tabular environment to make sure a row has a certain minimum height Chapter 29 Fonts In order to select another than the default typeface in Latex environment it is neces sary
177. fortunately there is a problem when two or more authors are working at the same time on the same document So how can authors synchronise these files A second possibility is to provide the document on a common file server which is available in most departments The risk of overwriting each others modifications can be eliminated by locking files that are currently edited However generally the file server can be only accessed from within a department Hence authors who are out of the building cannot use this method to update commit their changes In this case they will have to use another way to contour this problem So how can authors access these files A third possibility is to use a version control system A comprehensive list of version control systems can be found at http en wikipedia org wiki List of revision control software Version control systems keep track of all changes in files in a project If many authors modify a document at the same time the version control system tries to merge all modifications automatically Only if two or more authors have modified the same line the modifications cannot be merged automatically but the user has to resolve this conflict by deciding manually which of the two changes should be kept Authors can also comment their modifications so that the co authors can easily understand the workflow of this file As version control systems generally communicate over the internet e g through T
178. g more text for the date As maketitle creates new paragraphs on the title page this is detected and LaTeX complains that the previous paragraph has ended but date is not yet finished Underfull hbox Underfull hbox badness 1394 in paragraph at lines 28 30 NLY1 brm b n 10 Bull RJ LY1 brm m n 10 Ac count ing in Busi 94 This is a warning that LaTeX cannot stretch the line wide enough to fit without making the spacing bigger than its currently permitted maximum The badness 0 10 000 indicates how severe this is here you can probably ignore a badness of 1394 It says what lines of your file it was typesetting when it found this and the number in square brackets is the number of the page onto which the offending line was printed The codes separated by slashes are the typeface and font style and size used in the line Ignore them for the moment 38 CHAPTER 5 ERRORS AND WARNINGS Overfull hbox 101 Overfull hbox 9 11617pt too wide in paragraph at lines 860 861 NLY1 brm m n 10 Windows LY1 brm m it 10 see LY1 brm m n 10 X Win And the opposite warning this line is too long by a shade over 9pt The chosen hyphenation point which minimizes the error is shown at the end of the line Win Line numbers and page numbers are given as before In this case 9pt is too much to ignore over 3mm and a manual correction needs making such as a change to the hyphenation or the flexibility settings need changing
179. graphic ef fects inside the Verbatim environment It can also be used in conjunction with the 108 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING fancybox package and it can add reference line numbers useful for chunks of data or programming and it can even include entire external files Typesetting URLs One of either the hyperref or url packages provides the url command which prop erly typesets URLs for example Go to Nurl http www uni edu myname best website ever html for my website will show this URL exactly as typed similar to the verb command but the url command also performs a hyphenless break at punctuation characters It was designed for Web URLs so it understands their syntax and will never break mid way through an unpunctuated word only at slashes and full stops Bear in mind however that spaces are forbidden in URLs so using spaces in url arguments will fail as will using other non URL valid characters When using this command through the hyperref package the URL is clickable in the PDF document whereas it is not linked to the web when using only the url package Listing Environment This is also an extension of the verbatim environment provided by the moreverb pack age The extra functionality it provides is that it can add line numbers along side the text The command begin listing step first line The manda tory first line argument is for specifying which line the numbering shall comme
180. graphy style file bst will tell LaTeX how to format each attribute what order to put them in what punctuation to use in between particular attributes etc Unfortunately creating such a style by hand is not a trivial task Which is why Makebst also known as custom bib is the tool we need Makebst can be used to automatically generate a bst file based on your needs It is very simple and actually asks you a series of questions about your preferences Once complete it will then output the appropriate style file for you to use It should be installed with the LaTeX distribution otherwise you can download it and it s very simple to initiate At the command line type latex makebst LaTeX will find the relevant file and the questioning process will begin You will have to answer quite a few although note that the default answers are pretty sensi ble which means it would be impractical to go through an example in this tutorial However it is fairly straight forward And if you require further guidance then there is a comprehensive manual available recommend experimenting with it and seeing what the results are when applied to a LaTeX document 54 CHAPTER 7 BIBLIOGRAPHY MANAGEMENT If you are using a custom built bst file it is important that LaTeX can find it So make sure it s in the same directory as the LaTeX source file unless you are using one of the standard style files such as plain or plainnat that come bundled
181. guide for Windows as well all the software it uses is multiplatform One can also use dvisvgm an open source utility that converts from DVI to SVG Chapter 35 Internationalization When you write documents in languages other than English areas where LaTeX has to be configured appropriately 1 All automatically generated text strings have to be adapted to the new language 2 Language specific typographic rules In French for example there is a mandatory space before each colon character 3 LaTeX needs to know the hyphenation rules for the new language 4 You want to be able to insert all the language specific special characters directly without using any strange coding About the first second and part of the third point if your system is already configured appropriately and it is unless your LaTeX distribution has a bug the babel package by Johannes Braams will take care of everything You can use it loading in your preamble providing as an argument the language you want to use usepackage language babel you d better place it soon after the documentclass command so that all the other packages you will know the language you are using A list of the languages built into your LaTeX system will be displayed every time the compiler is started Babel will automatically activate the appropriate hyphenation rules for the language you choose If your LaTeX format does not support hyphenation in the language of your choi
182. h thref mailto my _address wikibooks org my _address wikibooks org it just shows your email address so people can know it even if the document is printed on paper but if the reader clicks on it s he can easily send you an email Or to incorporate the url package s formatting and line breaking abilities into the displayed text use textbackslash href mailto my _address wikibooks org textbackslash nolinkurl1 my _address wikibooks org When using this form note that the nolinkurl command is fragile and if the hy perlink is inside of a moving argument it must be preceeded by a protect command Customization The standard settings should be fine for most users but if you want to change some thing you can easily do it There are several variables you can change and there are two methods to pass those to the package You can pass the options as an argument of the package when you load it that s the standard way packages work or you can use the hypersetup package hypersetupfoptionl option2 you can pass as many options as you want separate them with a comma Those options have to be in the form variable_name new_value lEmail link with hyperref url packages comp text tex User Group CUSTOMIZATION 193 exactly the same format has to be used if you pass those options to the package while loading it like this Nusepackage pdftex optioni option2 hyperref Note that you always h
183. haracters directly in your document For more information see the Internationalization The Space Between Words To get a straight right margin in the output LaTeX inserts varying amounts of space between the words It inserts slightly more space at the end of a sentence as this makes the text more readable LaTeX assumes that sentences end with periods ques tion marks or exclamation marks If a period follows an uppercase letter this is not taken as a sentence ending since periods after uppercase letters normally occur in abbreviations Any exception from these assumptions has to be specified by the author A back slash in front of a space generates a space that will not be enlarged A tilde character generates a space that cannot be enlarged and additionally prohibits a line break The command V6 in front of a period specifies that this period terminates a sentence even when it follows an uppercase letter The additional space after periods can be disabled with the command frenchspacing which tells LaTeX not to insert more space after a period than after ordinary character This is very common in non English languages except bibliographies If you use frenchspacing the command V6 is not necessary Some very long words numbers or URLs may not be hyphenated properly and move far beyond side margin One solution for this problem is to use sloppypar environment which tells LaTeX to adjust word spacing less strictly As result
184. have loaded it with the standard command in the preamble usepackage rotating you can use three new environments begin sideways it will rotate the whole argument by 90 degrees counterclockwise Moreover begin turn 30 it will turn the argument of 30 degrees You can give any angle as an argument whether it is positive or negative It will leave the necessary space to avoid any overlapping of text begin rotate 30 like turn but it will not add any extra space NOTE Many DVI viewers do not support rotating of text and tables The text will be displayed normally You must convert your DVI file to a PDF document and view it in a PDF viewer to see the rotation in effect 201 202 CHAPTER 24 ROTATING PACKAGE Chapter 25 Beamer You can also make your presentation by using latex and the Beamer package The beamer package is provided with most of LaTeX distribution but you can also find it on CTAN A very good documentation comes with the package explaining the usage of the package on more leveles of detail here is a simple template to create your first slide documentclass beamer begin document the frame environnement creates a new slide begin frame put the slide title like this frametitle My first Frame items are classy for presentations begin itemize item you can item even put items end itemize end frame end document You can do a lot more with beamer animations table of conte
185. he one you prefer Finally you can also change the background color of the whole page by pagecolor declared color Chapter 22 Hyperref The package hyperref provides LaleX the ability to create hyperlinks within the document It works with pdflatez and also with standard latex used with dvips and ghostscript or dvipdfm to build a PDF file If you load it you will have the possibility to include interactive external links and all your internal references will be turned to hyperlinks The compiler pdflatex makes it possible to create PDF files directly from the LaTeX source and PDF supports more features than DVI In particular PDF supports hyperlinks and the only way to introduce them in LaTeX is using hyperref Moreover PDF can contain other information about a document such as the title the author etc and you can edit those using this same package Usage The basic usage with the standard settings is straightforward Just load the package in the preamble at the end of all the other packages but prior to other settings usepackage hyperref This will automatically turn all your internal references into hyperlinks It won t affect the way to write your documents just keep on using the standard label ref system with hyperref those connections will become links and you will be able to click on them to be redirected to the right page Moreover the table of contents list of figures tables and index will be made of hype
186. he page is full If you put it in the page you are sure that all the following text will be placed at the bottom of the page A practical example All these tips might have made you confused Then here is a practical example Get the test_title tex described above and here is an example of a title tex On the right you can see the output after you compile test_title tex in PDF begin titlepage begin center Upper part of the page includegraphics width 0 15 textwidth logo 1 textsc LARGE University of Beer 1 5cm textsc Large Final year project 0 5cm 4 Title HRule 0 4cm huge bfseries Lager brewing techniques 0 4cm HRule 1 5cm 4 Author and supervisor begin minipage 0 4 textwidth begin flushleft large emph Author John textsc Smith end flushleft end minipage begin minipage 0 4 textwidth begin flushright large emph Supervisor Dr Mark textsc Brown end flushright end minipage vfill 42 Bottom of the page large today end center end titlepage CHAPTER 6 TITLE CREATION A PRACTICAL EXAMPLE 43 UNIVERSITY OF BEER FINAL YEAR PROJECT Lager brewing techniques Author Supervisor John SMITH Dr Mark BROWN September 12 2006 44 CHAPTER 6 TITLE CREATION The picture is from a file called logo png that is in the same directory of both title tex and test_title tex Since I wanted to insert bo
187. hese may be placed in the History section You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission K For any section Entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications Preserve the Title of the section and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and or dedications given therein L Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document unaltered in their text and in their titles Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles M Delete any section Entitled Endorsements Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version N Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled Endorsements or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section O Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers If the Modified Version includes new front matter sections or appendices that qual ify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant To do this add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version s license notice These titles must be distinct from any other section titles You may add a section Entitled Endorsements provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties
188. his way does not allow us to use the same font and text size as the rest of the document has not mentioning usage of mathematical formulae in the legend 254 CHAPTER 32 TIPS AND TRICKS An excellent method to render graphs is through gnuplot a free and versatile plotting software that has a special output filter directly for exporting files to LaTeX We assume that the data is in a CSV file comma separated text in the first and third column A simple gnuplot script to plot the data can look like this set format Zg set title Graph 3 Dependence of V p on R 0 set xlabel Resistance R O Omega set ylabel Voltage V p V set border 3 set xtics nomirror set ytics nomirror set terminal epslatex set output graphi eps plot graphi csv using 1 3 Plot the data C Figure 32 1 GNUPlot can plot various numerical data functions error distribution as well as 3D graphs and surfaces Now gnuplot produces two files the graph drawing in graph eps and the text in graph tex The second includes the EPS image so that we only need to include the file graph tex in our document input graph1 tex The above steps can be automated by the package gnuplottex By placing gnu plot commands inside begin gnuplot end gnuplot and compiling with latex shell escape the graphs are created and added into your document USING GRAPHS FROM GNUPLOT 255 When using pdfLaTeX instead of simple LaTeX we must convert the
189. how to reference formulas Nbeginfequation label eq solve x2 5x 6 0 end equation begin equation x_1 frac 5 sqrt 25 4 times 6 2 end equation ll w begin equation x 2 frac 5 sqrt 25 4 times 6 2 end equation ll N and so we have solved equation ref eq solve 12 5r 6 0 1 and so we have solve equation 1 I http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib hyperref README THE VARIOREF PACKAGE 161 as you can see the label is placed soon after the beginning of the math mode In order to reference a formula you have to use an environment that adds numbers Most of the times you will be using the equation environment that is the best choice for one line formulas if you are using amsmath or not Note also the eq prefix in the label eqref The amsmath package adds a new command for referencing formulas it is eqref It works exactly like ref but it adds brackets so that instead of printing a plain number as 5 it will print 5 This can be useful to help the reader distinguishing between formulas and other things without the need to repeat the word formula before any reference It s output can be changed as you wish for more information see the amsmath documentation The varioref package The varioref package introduces a new command called vref This command is used exactly like the basic ref but it has a different output according to the context If
190. ial sample documents e A short example of how to use LaTeX for scientific reports by Stephen J Eglen e The not so Short Introduction to LaTeX by Tobias Oetiker is distributed with full latex sources Semantics of Programming Languages Articles on programming language research from syntax to semantics including source code listings type rules proof trees and even some category theory A good place to start is Mitchell Wand s Latex Resources including a sample file that also demon strates Didier Remy s mathpartir package The following are latex sources of some articles books or presentations from this field e Pugs Bootstrapping Perl 6 with Haskell This paper by Audrey Tang contains nice examples on configuring the listings package to format source code 289 290 APPENDIX D SAMPLE LATEX DOCUMENTS Appendix E Glossary List of commands brackets are optional arguments and braces are required arguments see slash marks following period ends sentence extra space new line See Page Layout thin space math mode thick space math mode X medium space math mode negative thin space math mode hyphenation tabbing set tab see tabbing gt tab see tabbing lt back tab see tabbing see tabbing V accent or tabbing accent or tabbing double vertical lines math mode start math environment 291 292 APPENDIX E GLOSSARY V end ma
191. ibliography 99 bibitem bib one_book some information bibitem bib one_article other information end thebibliography This will create a chapter like output showing properly all your references Any way even if it looks like a chapter it will not be handled like that so it will not appear on the Table of Contents at the beginning of the document If you want your bibliog raphy to be in the table of contents just add the following two lines just before the thebibliography environment clearpage addcontentsline toc chapter Bibliography The first line just terminates the current paragraph and page If you are writing a book you d better use cleardoublepage The second line will add a line in the Table of Contents first option toc it will be like the ones created by chapters second option chapter and the third argument will be printed on the corresponding line in the Table of Contents here Bibliography was chosen because it s the same text the thebibliography environment will automatically write when you use it but you are free to write whatever you like This trick is particularly useful when you have to insert the bibliography in the Table of Contents but it can work for anything When LaTeX finds the code above it will record the info as described and the current page number inserting a new line in the Contents page 249 250 CHAPTER 32 TIPS AND TRICKS Add the Bibliography to the Table of Contents as numbered
192. ile format whose markup or absence of markup has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transpar ent An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup Texinfo input format LaTeX input format SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD and standard conforming simple HTML PostScript or PDF designed for human modification Examples of transparent image formats include PNG XCF and JPG Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors SGML or XML for which the DTD and or processing tools are not generally available and the machine generated HTML PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only 305 The Title Page means for a printed book the title page itself plus such follow ing pages as are needed to hold legibly the material this License requires to appear in the title page For works in formats which do not have any title page as such Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work s title preceding the beginning of the body of the text A section Entitled XYZ means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that trans lates XYZ
193. imple commands that allow you to customize the header and footer lines of your document For a more complete guide the author of the package produced this documentation The tricky problem when customizing headers and footers is to get things like running section and chapter names in there LaTeX accomplishes this with a two stage approach In the header and footer definition you use the commands rightmark and leftmark to represent the current section and chapter heading respectively The values of these two commands are overwritten whenever a chapter or section command is processed For ultimate flexibility the chapter command and its friends do not redefine rightmark and leftmark themselves They call yet another command chaptermark sectionmark or subsectionmark that is responsible for redefining rightmark and leftmark If you want to change the look of the chapter name in the header line you need only renew the chaptermark command To begin add the following lines to your preamble usepackage fancyhdr setlength headheight 15 2pt pagestyle fancy The second line will prevent LaTeX from giving a warning Both the header and footer comprise three elements each according to its horizontal position left centre or right To set their values the following commands are available lhead lh even lIh odd 1 if even lf odd chead ch even ch odd cf even cf odd rhead rh even rh odd
194. in another language Here XYZ stands for a specific section name men tioned below such as Acknowledgements Dedications Endorsements or History To Preserve the Title of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section Entitled XYZ according to this defini tion The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License but only as regards disclaiming warranties any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License 2 VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium either commercially or noncommercially provided that this License the copyright notices and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute However you may accept compensation in exchange for copies If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3 You may also lend copies under the same conditions stated above and you may publicly display copies 3 COPYING IN QUANTITY If you pub
195. in maths such elements are assumed to be positive unless a is prefixed to it In this instance you want the sign to appear close to the appropriate element to show their association If you put a or a with nothing before it but you want it to be handled like a binary operator you can add an invisible character before the operator using This can be useful if you are writing multiple line formulas and a new line could start with a or a for example then you can fix some strange alignments adding the invisible character where necessary Controlling horizontal spacing Latex is obviously pretty good at typesetting maths it was one of the chief aims of the core Tex system that Latex extends However it can t always be relied upon to accurately interpret formulas in the way you did It has to make certain assumptions when there are ambiguous expressions The result tends to be slightly incorrect hori zontal spacing In these events the output is still satisfactory yet any perfectionists will no doubt wish to fine tune their formulas to ensure spacing is correct These are generally very subtle adjustments 138 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS There are other occasions where Latex has done its job correctly but you just want to add some space maybe to add a comment of some kind For example in the following equation it is preferable to ensure there is a decent amount of space between the maths and the text f n Meft NC b
196. in strings adding particular underscores frame single adds a frame around the code tabsize 2 4 sets default tabsize to 2 spaces captionpos b 4 sets the caption position to bottom 199 breaklines true sets automatic line breaking breakatwhitespace false sets if automatic breaks should only happen at whitespace escapeinside if you want to add a comment within your code The last line needs an explanation You need it if you want to add some text within the code that will not be printed Note that by default comments of the language you are inserting will be printed the command escapeinside A B will define comments for listings only All the code between the string A and B will be ignored In the example above the comments for Octave start with and they are going to be printed in the document unless they start with but you have to remember to close the comment with another If you add the above paragraph the following can be used to alter the settings within the code lstset language C caption Descriptive Caption Text label DescriptiveLabel A lot more detailed information can be found in a PDF by Carsten Heinz Details and documentation about the Listings package can be found at its CTAN website 200 CHAPTER 23 LISTINGS PACKAGE Chapter 24 Rotating The package rotating gives you the possibility to rotate any object of an arbitrary angle Once you
197. in verbatim but its main aim is to include the source code of any programming language within your document It supports highlighting of all the most common languages and it is highly customizable If you just want to write code within your document the package provides the Istlisting environment begin lstlisting put your code here end lstlisting Another possibility that is very useful if you created a program on several files and you are still editing it is to import the code from the source itself This way if you modify the source you just have to recompile the LaTeX code and your document will be updated The command is lstinputlisting source_filename py in the example there is a Python source but it doesn t matter you can include any file but you have to write the full file name It will be considered plain text and it will be highlighted according to your settings that means it doesn t recognize the programming language by itself It supports the following programming languages ABAP IDL Plasm ACSL inform POV Ada Java Prolog Algol JVMIS Promela Ant ksh Python Assembler Lisp R Awk Logo Reduce bash make Rexx Basic Mathematica RSL C Matlab Ruby C Mercury S Caml MetaPost SAS 197 198 CHAPTER 23 LISTINGS PACKAGE Clean Miranda Scilab Cobol Mizar sh Comal ML SHELXL csh Modula 2 Simula Delphi MuPAD SQL Eiffel NASTRAN tcl Elan Oberon 2 TeX erlang OCL VBScript Euphoria Octave Verilog Fortran Oz VHDL GCL P
198. ins filename in a command window in your temporary directory This will extract all the files needed from the dtx file which is why you must have both of them present in the temporary directory Note down or print the 185 186 CHAPTER 20 INSTALLING EXTRA PACKAGES names of the files created if there are a lot of them read the log file if you want to see their names again 2 Create the documentation Run LaTeX on the dtx file You might need to run it twice or more to get the cross references right just like any other LaTeX document This will create a dvi file of documentation explaining what the package is for and how to use it If you prefer to create PDF then run pdfLaTeX instead If you created a idx as well it means that the document contains an index too If you want the index to be created properly follow the steps in the indexing section Sometimes you will see that a glo glossary file has been produced Run the following command instead makeindex s gglo ist o name gls name glo 3 Install the files While the documentation is printing move or copy the files created in step 1 from your temporary directory to the right place s in your TeX local installation directory tree always your directory tree a to prevent your new package accidentally overwriting files in the main TeX directories and b to avoid your newly installed files being overwritten when you next update your ver sion of TeX The righ
199. ion to LaTeX 2e from http www ctan org tex archive info lshort bulgarian lshort bg pdf Czech Czech is fine using usepackage czech babel usepackage T1 fontenc usepackage utf8x inputenc You may use different encoding but UTF 8 is becoming standard and it allows you to have czech quotation marks directly in your text Otherwise there are macros glaq and grqq to produce left and right quote French Some hints for those creating French documents with LaTeX you can load French language support with the following command usepackage frenchb babel 268 CHAPTER 35 INTERNATIONALIZATION There are multiple options for typesetting French documents depending on the flavor of French french frenchb and francais for Parisian French and acadian and canadien for new world French All enable French hyphenation if you have configured your LaTeX system accordingly All of these also change all automatic text into French chapter prints Chapitre today prints the current date in French and so on set of new commands also becomes available which allows you to write French input files more easily Check out the following table for inspiration input code rendered output Vog guillemets fg guillemets M up me D up r D 1 ier 1 iere 1 ieres 1 17 17 2 ieme 4 iemes 2 No 1 no 2 N 1 n 2 20 degres C 45 degres 20 C 45 M bsc
200. is follow its instructions and run LaTeX for the third time and the document will be output as expected without further problems Biography styles Below you can see three styles from available with LaTeX 52 CHAPTER 7 BIBLIOGRAPHY MANAGEMENT Instead of WYSIWYG editors typesetting systems like TeX 1 or LaTeX can be used N References Paul W Abrahams Kathryn A Hargreaves and Karl Berry TEXfor the Impatient 2003 2 Leslie Lamport A Document Preparation System Addison Wes ley second edition 1994 Figure 7 1 plain Instead of WYSIWYG editors typesetting systems like TeX 1 or LaTeX 2 can be used References 1 P W Abrahams A Hargreaves and K Berry TX for the Impatient 2003 2 L Lamport A Document Preparation System Addison Wesley E second edition 1994 Figure 7 2 abbrv Instead of WYSIWYG editors typesetting systems like or LaTeX Lam94 can be used References AHB03 W Abrahams Kathryn A Hargreaves and Karl Berry TpEXfor the Impatient 2003 Lam94 Leslie Lamport BTgX A Document Preparation System Addison Wesley second edition 1994 Figure 7 3 alpha Web page http www cs stir ac uk kjt software latex showbst html con tains more examples BIBTEX 53 Including URLs in bibliography As you can see there is no field for URLs One possibility is to include Int
201. is my proof NL a 2 b 2 c 2 qedhere M end proof To use a custom Q E D symbol redefine the qedsymbol command To hide the Q E D symbol altogether redefine it to be blank renewcommand qedsymbol Theorem styles It adds the possibility to change the output of the environments defined by newtheorem using the theoremstyle command command in the header theoremstyle stylename the argument is the style you want to use All subsequently defined theorems will use this style Here is a list of the possible pre defined styles 1Requires the amsthm package EXTERNAL LINKS 155 Stylename Description plain Used for theorems lemmas propositions etc default definition Used for definitions and examples remark Used for remarks and notes Custom styles To define your own style the use the newtheoremstyle command newtheoremstyle stylename name of the style to be used spaceabove measure of space to leave above the theorem E g 3pt spacebelow measure of space to leave below the theorem E g 3pt bodyfont name of font to use in the body of the theorem indent measure of space to indent headfont name of head font headpunctuation 4 punctuation between head and body space after theorem head headspec Manually specify head Any arguments that are left blank will assume their default value Here is an ex ample headspec thmname 1 thmnumber 2
202. is rather inconvenient to search for small differences in long lines Note For instance the LaTeX editor Kile http kile sourceforge net can assist the user in this task when it is configured to add a vertical line that marks the 80th column We find it very useful to introduce the additional line breaks at logical breaks of the sentence e g before a relative clause or a new part of the sentence starts An example LaTeX code that is formatted according to these guidelines is the source 242 CHAPTER 31 COLLABORATIVE WRITING OF LATEX DOCUMENTS code of the article Tools for Collaborative Writing of Scientific LaTeX Documents by Arne Henningsen that is published including the source code in The Prac TeX Journal 2007 Number http www tug org pracjourn 2007 3 henningsen If the authors work on different operating systems their LaTeX editors will proba bly save the files with different newline end of line characters http en wikipedia org wiki Newline To avoid this type of ineffective modifications all users can agree on a specific newline character and configure their editor to use this newline char acter Another alternative is to add the subversion property svn eol style and set it to native In this case Subversion automatically converts all newline characters of this file to the native newline character of the author s operating system http svnbook red bean com en 1 4 svn advanced props file portabili
203. is utterly essential otherwise nothing will work 187 The reason this process has not been automated widely is that there are still thousands of installations which do not conform to the TDS such as old shared Unix systems and some Microsoft Windows systems so there is no way for an installation program to guess where to put the files you have to know this There are also systems where the owner user or installer has chosen not to follow the recommended TDS directory structure or is unable to do so for political or security reasons such as a shared system where she cannot write to a protected directory The reason for having the texmf local directory called texmf 1ocal on some systems is to provide a place for local modifications or personal updates especially if you are a user on a shared or managed system Unix Linux VMS Windows NT 2000 XP etc where you may not have write access to the main TeX installation directory tree You can also have a personal texmf subdirectory in your own login directory Your installation must be configured to look in these directories first however so that any updates to standard packages will be found there before the superseded copies in the main texmf tree All modern TeX installations should do this anyway but if not you can edit texmf web2c texmf cnf yourself Type Directory under texmf local Description cls tex latex base Document clas
204. ish babel begin document THE TABULAR ENVIRONMENT 63 Without specifying width for last column begin center begin tabular 111111111 hline Day amp Min Temp amp Max Temp amp Summary hline Monday amp 11C amp 22C amp A clear day with lots of sunshine However the strong breeze will bring down the temperatures hline Tuesday amp 9C amp 19C amp Cloudy with rain across many northern regions Clear spells across most of Scotland and Northern Ireland but rain reaching the far northwest hline Wednesday amp 10C amp 21C amp Rain will still linger for the morning Conditions will improve by early afternoon and continue throughout the evening hline end tabular end center With width specified begin center begin tabular 1 1 1 p 5cm hline Day amp Min Temp amp Max Temp amp Summary hline Monday amp 11C amp 22C amp A clear day with lots of sunshine However the strong breeze will bring down the temperatures hline Tuesday amp 9C amp 19C amp Cloudy with rain across many northern regions Clear spells across most of Scotland and Northern Ireland but rain reaching the far northwest hline Wednesday amp 10C amp 21C amp Rain will still linger for the morning Conditions will improve by early afternoon and continue throughout the evening hline end tabular end center end document You get the following output 64 CHAPTER 8
205. isplayed displayed formulas are separate from the main text As maths require special environments there are naturally the appropriate envi ronment names you can use in the standard way Unlike most other environments however there are some handy shorthands to declaring your formulas The following table summarizes them Type Environment LaTeX shorthand TeX shorthand Text begin math end math 9 Displayed MES NI 9 begin displaymath end displaymath Note Using the should be avoided as it may cause problems particu larly with the AMS LaTeX macros Furthermore should a problem occur the error messages may not be helpful Additionally there is a second possible environment for the displayed type of for mulas equation The difference between this and displaymath is that equation also adds sequential equation numbers by the side If you are typing text normally you are said to be in text mode while you are typing within one of those mathematical environments you are said to be in math mode that has some differences compared to the text mode 1 Most spaces and line breaks do not have any significance as all spaces are either derived logically from the mathematical expressions or have to be specified with special commands such as quad 2 Empty lines are not allowed Only one paragraph per formula 3 Each letter is considered to be the name of a variable and will
206. istributions include it In this sense installing configuring and maintaining Subversion is a very simple task Most MS Windows users access the Subversion server by the TortoiseSVN client http tortoisesvn tigris org because it provides the most usual interface for common users Linux users usually use the Subversion command line client or eSun GUI http zoneit free fr esvn with KDiff http kdiff3 sourceforge net for showing complex differences Hosting LaTeX files in Subversion On our Subversion server we have one repository for a common texmf tree Its structure complies with the TeX Directory Structure guidelines TDS http www tug org tds tds html see figure 31 1 This repository provides LaTeX classes LaTeX styles and BibTeX styles that are not available in the LaTeX dis tributions of the users e g because they were bought or developed for the in ternal use at our department All users have a working copy of this repository and have configured LaTeX to use this as their personal texmf tree For instance teTeX http www tug org tetex users can edit their TeX configuration file e g etc texmf web2c texmf cnf and set the variable TEXMFHOME to the path of the working copy of the common texmf tree e g by TEXMFHOME HOME texmf MiK TeX http www miktex org users can add the path of the working copy of the common texmf tree in the Roots tab of the MiK TeX Options If a new class or style file has been
207. item If you instead want bibliography to be numbered section or chapter you ll likely use this way clearpage section Bibliography renewcommand refname begin thebibliography 99 This will define heading of bibliography to be empty so you can start normal section before bibliography id est amp exempli gratia i e amp e g If you simply use the forms i e or e g LaTeX will treat the periods as end of sentence periods The correct syntax is i e N Or e g which tells LaTeX not to consider the period as an end of sentence period This syntax results in a shorter space Note 124 1 In Chicago style i e and e g are almost always followed by a comma 2 If the command frenchspacing has been given in the preamble the space between sentences is already short Referencing Figures or Equations A reference to a figure equation is normally done using the ref command The result is shown in Figure ref fig result To avoid that line break separated Figure and ref use to glue the reference to the description The result is shown in Figure ref fig result Grouping Figure Equation Numbering by Section For long documents the numbering can become cumbersome as the numbers reach into double and triple digits To reset the counters at the start of each section and prefix the numbers by the section number include the following in the preamble NEW SQUAR
208. ith description about how to get it Other formats can be produced such as RTF which can be used in Microsoft Word and HTML However these documents are produced from software that parses and interprets the LaTeX files and do not implement all the features available for the primary DVI and PDF outputs Nonetheless they do work and can be crucial tools for collaboration with colleague that do not edit documents with LaTeX Convert to PDF DVI gt PDF dvipdfm my file dvi will create my file pdf Another way is to pass through PS generation dvi2ps myfile dvi ps2pdf myfile ps you will get also a file called my file ps that you can delete 261 262 CHAPTER 34 EXPORT TO OTHER FORMATS Merging PDF If you have created different PDF documents and you want to merge them into one single PDF file you can use the following command line command You need to have Ghostscript installed For Windows gswin32 dNOPAUSE sDEVICE pdfwrite sOUTPUTFILE Merged pdf dBATCH 1 pdf 2 pdf 3 pdf For Linux gs dNOPAUSE sDEVICE pdfwrite sOUTPUTFILE Merged pdf dBATCH 1 2 pdf 3 pdf Another option to check out is pdftk or PDF toolkit which is a command line tool that can manipulate PDFs in many ways To merge one or more files use pdftk 1 pdf 2 pdf 3 pdf cat output 123 pdf Note If you are merging external PDF documents into a Latex document which is compiled with pdflatex a much simpler option is to use the pdfpages package
209. kage package name For example to use the color package which lets you typeset in colors you would type Ndocumentclass 11pt a4paper oneside report usepackage color begin document 179 180 CHAPTER 19 PACKAGES end document You can include several package names in one usepackage command by separating the names with commas like this usepackage packagel package2 package3 and you can have more than one usepackage command Some packages allow optional settings in square brackets If you use these you must give the package its own separate usepackage command like geometry shown below documentclass 11pt a4paper oneside report usepackage pslatex palatino avant graphicx color usepackage margin 2cm geometry begin document title color red Practical Typesetting author color blue Peter Flynn Silmaril Consultants date color green December 2005 maketitle end document Many packages can have additional formatting specifications in optional arguments in square brackets in the same way as geometry does Read the documentation for the package concerned to find out what can be done You can pass several options together separated by a comma usepackage option1 option2 option3 package_name Package documentation To find out what commands a package provides and thus how to use it you need to read the documentation In the texmf doc subdirectory of your installation there
210. ke this In the German speaking part of Switzerland typesetters use lt guillemets gt the same way the French do A major problem arises from the use of commands like f1q If you use the OTI font which is the default font the guillemets will look like the math symbol lt which turns a typesetter s stomach T1 encoded fonts on the other hand do contain the required symbols So if you are using this type of quote make sure you use the T1 encoding usepackage 1 fontenc Greek This is the preamble you need to write in the Greek language usepackage english greek babel usepackage 8859 7 inputenc This preamble enables hyphenation and changes all automatic text to Greek A set of new commands also becomes available which allows you to write Greek input files more easily In order to temporarily switch to English and vice versa one can use the commands textlatin english text and textgreek greek text that both take one argument which is then typeset using the requested font encoding Otherwise you can use the command selectlanguage described in a previous section Use euro for the Euro symbol Hungarian Similar to Italian but use the following lines usepackage magyar babel usepackage latin2 inputenc usepackage 1 fontenc e More information in hungarian 270 CHAPTER 35 INTERNATIONALIZATION Italian Italian is well supported by LaTeX Just add Nusepackage italian
211. l use both compilers with doc uments with pictures as well as long as you always remember to provide the pictures in two formats EPS and one of JPG PNG and PDF Borders It is possible to have LaTeX create a border around your image by using fbox setlength fboxsep 0Opt setlength fboxrule 0 5pt fbox includegraphics chick XFIG 81 You can control the border padding with the setlength fboxsep Opt command in this case I set it to Opt to avoid any padding so the border will be placed tightly around the image You can control the thickness of the border by adjusting the setlength fboxrule 0 5pt command Graphics storage There is a way to tell LaTeX where to look for images for example it can be useful if you had stored images centrally for use in many different documents The answer is in a command graphicspath which you supply with an argument giving the name of an additional directory path you want searched when a file uses the includegraphics command here are some examples graphicspath c mypict 1 camera graphicspath var lib images graphicspath images graphicspath images_folder other_folder third_folder please see http www ctan org tex archive macros latex required graphics grfguide pdf As you may have noticed in the first example I ve used the safe MS DOS form of the Windows MyPictures folder because it s a bad idea to use directory names containing spaces Using absolu
212. lable and which ones are required or optional etc So look at this entry type reference and also this field reference for descriptions of all the fields It may be worth bookmarking or printing these pages so that they are easily at hand when you need them Authors BibTeX can be quite clever with names of authors It can accept names in forename surname or surname forename I personally use the former but remember that the order you input them or any data within an entry for that matter is customizable and so you can get BibTeX to manipulate the input and then output it however you like If you use the forename surname method then you must be careful with a few special names where there are compound surnames for example John von Neumann In this form BibTeX assumes that the last word is the surname and everything before is the forename plus any middle names You must therefore manually tell BibTeX to keep the von and Neumann together This is achieved easily using curly braces So the final result would be John von Neumann This is easily avoided with the surname forename since you have a comma to separate the surname from the forename Secondly there is the issue of how to tell BibTeX when a reference has more than one author This is very simply done by putting the keyword and in between every author As we can see from another example book goossens93 author Michel Goossens and Frank Mittlebach and Alexander
213. lar gt c lt Another example is changing the font begin tabular gt small c to print the column in a small font The argument of the gt and lt specifications must be correctly balanced when it comes to and characters This means that gt bfseries is valid while gt textbf will not work and gt textbf is not valid If there is the need to use the text of the table as an argument for instance using the underline to pro duce a line below the text one should use the bgroup and egroup commands gt underline bgroup c lt egroup produces the intended effect Text wrapping in tables LaTeX s algorithms for formatting tables have a few shortcomings One is that it will not automatically wrap text in cells even if it has overrun the width of the page For columns that you know will contain a certain amount of text then it is recommended that you use the p attribute and specify the desired width of the column although it may take some trial and error to get the result you want Use the m attribute to have the lines aligned toward the middle of the box and the b attribute to align along the bottom of the box Here is a practical example The following code creates two tables with the same code the only difference is that the last column of the second one has a defined width of 5 centimeters while in the first one we didn t specify any width Compiling this code documentclass article usepackage engl
214. le 0 2 end picture B v c tanh y The control points of the two B zier curves were calculated with formulas The positive branch is determined by P 0 0 m 1 and 2 tanh2 1 cosh 2 Again the picture is defined in mathematically convenient coordinates and the lower left corner is assigned the mathematical coordinates 3 2 black disk The picture environment and gnuplot The powerful scientific plotting package gnuplot has the capability to output directly to a LaTeX picture environment It is often far more convenient to plot directly to LaTeX since this saves having to deal with potentially troublesome postscript files Plotting scientific data or indeed mathematical figures this way gives much greater control and of course typesetting ability than is available from other means such as postscript Such pictures can then be added to a document by an include command N B gnuplot is a powerful piece of software with a vast array of commands A full discussion of gnuplot lies beyond the scope of this note XY pic xy is a special package for drawing diagrams To use it simply add the following line to the preamble of your document usepackage options xy where options is a list of functions from XY pic you want to load These options are primarily useful XY PIC 219 when debugging the package I recommend you pass the a11 option making LaTeX load all the XY com
215. le want to change most often with Enumerated lists are the coun ters Therefore to go any further a brief introduction to LaTeX counters is required Anything that LaTeX automatically numbers such as section headers figures and itemized lists there is a counter associated with it that controls the numbering Each counter also has a default format that dictates how it is displayed whenever LaTeX needs to print it Such formats are specified using internal LaTeX commands Command Example arabic 1 2 3 4 alph a b c Alph A B C roman i ii iii Roman I II III fnsymbol Aimed at footnotes see below but prints a sequence of symbols There are four individual counters that are associated with itemized lists each one represents the four possible levels of nesting which are called enumi enumii enumiii enumiv Each counter entity holds various bits of information about itself To get to the numbered element simply use the followed immediately i e no space by the name of the counter e g theenumi This is often referred to as the representation of a counter Also in order to reset any of these counters in the middle of an enumeration simply use setcounter For example to reset enumi use setcounter enumi 0 Now that s most of the technicalities out of the way To make changes to the for matting of a given level renewcommand representation format_command counter Admitte
216. length For arrows the components of the direction vector are even more narrowly re stricted than for line segments namely to the integers 4 3 3 4 Compo nents also have to be coprime no common divisor except 1 Notice the effect of the thicklines command on the two arrows pointing to the upper left setlength unitlength 0 75mm begin picture 60 40 put 30 20 vector 1 0 30 put 30 20 vector 4 1 20 put 30 20 vector 3 1 25 put 30 20 vector 2 1 30 put 30 20 vector 1 2 10 thicklines put 30 20 vector 4 1 30 put 30 20 vector 1 4 5 thinlines put 30 20 vector 1 1 5 put 30 20 vector 1 4 5 end picture Circles The command put x y circle diameter draws a circle with center x y and diameter not radius diameter The picture environment only admits diameters up to approximately 14mm and even below this limit not all diameters are possible The circle command produces disks filled circles As in the case of line segments one may have to resort to additional packages such as eepic or pstricks THE PICTURE ENVIRONMENT 211 setlength unitlength 1mm begin picture 60 40 put 20 30 circle 1 put 20 30 circle 2 put 20 30 circle 4 put 20 30 circle 8 put 20 30 circle 16 put 20 30 circle 32 put 40 30 circle 1 put 40 30 circle 2 pu
217. lish printed copies or copies in media that commonly have printed covers of the Document numbering more than 100 and the Document s license notice requires Cover Texts you must enclose the copies in covers that carry clearly and legibly all these Cover Texts Front Cover Texts on the front cover and Back Cover Texts on the back cover Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible You may add other material on the covers in addition Copying with changes limited to the covers as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly you should put the first ones listed as many as fit reasonably on the actual cover and continue the rest onto adjacent pages 306 APPENDIX G GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100 you must either include a machine readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer network location from which the general network using public has access to download using public standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document free of added mate rial If you use the latter option you must t
218. look professional For starters we want a way of adding captions and to be able to cross reference What we need is a way of defining figures It would also be good if Latex could apply similar principles to when it arranges text to look its best to arranging pictures too This is where floats come into play Floats Floats are containers for things in a document that cannot be broken over a page LaTeX by default recognizes table and figure floats but you can define new ones of your own see below Floats are there to deal with the problem of the object that won t fit on the present page and to help when you really don t want the object here just now Floats are not part of the normal stream of text but separate entities positioned in a part of the page to themselves top middle bottom left right or wherever the designer specifies They always have a caption describing them and they are always numbered so they can be referred to from elsewhere in the text LaTeX automatically floats Tables and Figures depending on how much space is left on the page at the point that they are processed If there is not enough room on the current page the float is moved to the top of the next page This can be changed by moving the Table or Figure definition to an earlier or later point in the text or by adjusting some of the parameters which control automatic floating Authors sometimes have many floats occurring in rapid succession which
219. losed The way to fix this is to put a period the invisible delimiter to match using e g Meft right To get the heights right add an invisible object with height using e g vphantom frac 1 2 Another way to take care of this is to set the size yourself with for instance one of big Big bigg Bigg Other options If you want several formulas to be labeled with the same number but you still want to identify them with different letters then you can use the subequations environments You put begin subequations outside any mathematical environment until LaTeX finds end subequations all the labels for equations will have the same number with a letter next to it For example they ll be labeled 11a 11b 11c etc Here is an example begin subequations begin gather 0 2 0 3 2 0 end gather end subequations ax b 0 11a br c 0 11b az cz d 20 11c 146 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS you can use any mathematical environment within subequations If you want to underline the importance of a formula you can put it inside a box To do so choose the mathematical environment you prefer and type your formula as an argument of boxed Here is an example Nbeginfequation boxed a 2 b x 0 end equation ax br c 0 Matrix like environments Amsmath introduces several commands that will help you typing matrices
220. ly differently depending on the compiler you are using latex or pdflater But as we will see later it is possible to add a sort of abstraction layer to hide the details of which compiler you re using and the compiler will handle the translation itself Note that since LaTeX is just a collection of macros for TeX if you compile a plain TeX document with a LaTeX compiler such as pdflatex it will work while the opposite is not true if you try to compile a LaTeX source with a TeX compiler you will get only a lot of errors The following diagram shows the relationships between the La TeX source code and all the formats you can create from it ps2pdf pdf2ps pdftex png ipg pdflatex dvipdfm The boxed red text represents the file formats the blue text on the arrows rep resents the commands you have to use the small dark green text under the boxes represents the image formats that are supported Any time you pass through an arrow you lose some information which might decrease the quality of your document There fore in order to achieve the highest quality in your output file you should choose the 13 shortest route to reach your target format This is probably the most convenient way to obtain an output in your desired format anyway Starting from a LaTeX source the best way is to use only latex for a DVI output or pdflatex for a PDF output converting to PostScript only when it is necessary to print the d
221. ma I often use the surname of the first author followed by the last two digits of the year hence lamport94 If that author has produced more than one reference for a given year then I add letters after a b etc But you should do whatever works for you Everything after the key is the reference itself You need to type it as you want it to be presented I have put the different parts of the reference such as author title etc on different lines for read ability These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX I wanted the title to be in italics so I used the emph command to achieve this Citations To actually cite a given document is very easy Go to the point where you want the citation to appear and use the following Vcite cite key where the cite_key is that of the bibitem you wish to cite When LaTeX processes the document the citation will be cross referenced with the bibitems and replaced with the appropriate number citation The advantage here once again is that LaTeX looks after the numbering for you If it was totally manual then adding or removing a reference can be a real chore as you would have to re number all the citations by hand Instead of WYSIWYG editors typesetting systems like TeX or LaTeX cite lamport94 can be used BIBTEX 4T Multiple citations When a sequence of multiple citations are needed you should use a single cite command The citations are then separated by commas Here s an exam
222. mands XY pic diagrams are drawn over a matrix oriented canvas where each diagram element is placed in a matrix slot A begin displaymath xymatrixf A amp B NN C D C amp D end displaymath The xymatrix command must be used in math mode Here we specified two lines and two columns To make this matrix a diagram we just add directed arrows using the ar command B C pan A begin displaymath xymatrix Nar r amp B Nar d NN D D Nar u amp C ar 1 end displaymath lt The arrow command is placed on the origin cell for the arrow The arguments are the direction the arrow should point to up down right and left A B begin displaymath xymatrix ar d Nar dr Var r amp D C D amp C end displaymath To make diagonals just use more than one direction In fact you can repeat directions to make bigger arrows 220 CHAPTER 27 PRODUCING MATHEMATICAL GRAPHICS A begin displaymath xymatrix B D A Nar d Nar dr Nar drr amp amp B amp C amp D end displaymath We can draw even more interesting diagrams by adding labels to the arrows To do this we use the common superscript and subscript operators f A B g begin displaymath xymatrix Du Nar r f ar d _g amp ar d g f amp C D ar r _ f end displaymath As shown you use these operators as in math mode The only difference is that that superscript
223. mark This field can be added in JabRef by selecting Options amp rarr Set up general fields and adding the word location using the semicolon as delimiter somewhere in the line that starts with General see figure 31 4 AX JabRef preferences General PDF and PS links Groups Appearance External programs Entry table Entry table columns Key pattern Entry preview Name formatter XMP metadata Advanced Import preferences Export preferences Main PDF directory Main PS directory Use Regular Expression Search fhome suapm09s Net BibTeX Jhome suapmo095 Net BibT ex bibtexkey extension External programs Path to PDF viewer Path to PS viewer Path to HTML viewer Path to LyX pipe gv mozilla home suapmo95 vx lyxpipe OK Cancel Figure 31 5 Specify Main PDF directory in JabRef Third we put all PDF files of publications in a specific subdirectory in our file server where we use the BibTeX key as file name We inform JabRef about this subdirectory by selecting Options amp rarr Preferences amp rarr External programs and adding the path of the this subdirectory in the field Main PDF directory see figure 31 5 If a PDF file of a publication is available the user can push the Auto button left of JabRefs Pdf field to automatically add the file name of the PDF file Now all users who hav
224. mation to the reader Usually it is non essential information which can be placed at the bottom of the page This keeps the main body of text concise The footnote facility is easy to use The command you need is footnote text Do not leave a space between the command and the word where you wish the footnote marker to appear otherwise Latex will process that space and will leave the output not looking as intended Creating a footnote is easy footnote An example footnote Creating a footnote is An example footnote Latex will obviously take care of typesetting the footnote at the bottom of the page Each footnote is numbered sequentially a process that as you should have guessed by now is automatically done for you It is possible to customize the footnote marking By default they are numbered sequentially Arabic However without going too much into the mechanics of Latex at this point it is possible to change this using the following command which needs to be placed at the beginning of the document or at least before the first footnote command is issued Margin Notes I dare say that this is not a commonly used function however I thought I d include it anyway as it is simple to use command marginpar margin text will po sition the enclosed text on to the outside margin To swap the default side issue reversemarginpar and that moves margin notes to the opposite side Summary
225. me between the image and the surrounding text You can change it to get a better result but if you don t keep the image smaller than the wrap you will see the image over the text and this shouldn t be the effect you want to get Tip for figures with too much white space It happens that you ll generate figures with too much or too little white space on the top or bottom In such a case you can simply make use of the optional argument lineheight It specifies the height of the figure in number of lines of text Another possibility is adding space within the float using the vspace com mand The argument is the size of the space you want to add you can use any unit you want including pt mm in etc If you provide a negative argument it will add a negative space thus removing some white space Here is an example the code is exactly the one of the previous case we just added some negative vertical spaces to shrink everything up begin wrapfigure r 0 5 textwidth vspace 20pt begin center includegraphics width 0 48 textwidth 6011 end center CAPTIONS vspace 20pt caption A gull vspace 10pt end wrapfigure Gulls are birds in the family Laridae They are most closely related to the terns family Sternidae auks and skimmers and more distantly to the waders Most gulls belong to the large genus Larus They are in general medium to large birds typically grey or white often with black
226. means on top of the arrow and subscript means under the arrow There is a third operator the vertical bar It causes text to be placed in the arrow A f gt B begin displaymath Y xymatrix ps ar r If Nar d llg amp B ar d l g NN Dp es D Nar r lltf end displaymath To draw an arrow with a hole in it use ar hole In some situations it is important to distinguish between different types of arrows This can be done by putting labels on them or changing their appearance XY PIC 221 e e 5 e shorthandoff begin displaymath xymatrix bullet ar gt rr amp amp bullet bullet ar lt rr amp amp bullet bullet ar rr amp amp bullet bullet ar rr amp amp bullet e bullet are rr amp amp NbulletNN bullet ar gt rr amp amp bullet bullet ar 2 gt rr amp amp bullet bullet ar 3 gt rr amp amp bullet bullet ar rr amp amp Nbullet end displaymath shorthandon Notice the difference between the following two diagrams begin displaymath e xymatrix bullet Nar r ar gt r amp bullet end displaymath begin displaymath xymatrix m bullet ar r nS ar _ gt r amp bullet end displaymath The modifiers between the slashes define how the curves are drawn X Y pic offers ma
227. mp b5Mleft 2xy 2 3x 2y xyMight NN amp 5x left 2y72 3xy y right NN amp Sxy left 2y 3x 1 right end split end equation 10ry 15 2 Say 5 222 322y 5x 2y 3ry y 9 2y 3x 1 Splitting long formulas LaTeX does not take care of splitting long formulas in several lines you have to do it by yourself One possible approach is to separate the long formula into smaller parts and align it manually this way you will get the best approach according to your needs Anyway if you want LaTeX to work for you you d better use the multline ADVANCED MATHEMATICS AMS MATH PACKAGE 145 environment If you use it all you have to do is to add where you want to start a new line LaTeX will set the alignment automatically the first line will be left aligned the last line right aligned all the lines in the middle will be centered Here is an example begin multline left 1 x right n 1 nx frac n left n 1 right 2 x 2 frac n left n 1 right left n 2 right 3 x73 frac n left n 1 right left n 2 right left n 3 right 4 x74 dots end multline 1 l a 14 nxr n n 1 n 2 T T q PAIO OTOA Y 10 There is a starred version multline if you don t want to label it Remember that if you are using adapting brackets such as left Wright you cannot start a new line until all those brackets have been c
228. n of Donald E Knuth s METAFONT MetaPost has the very powerful and mathemati cally sophisticated programming language of METAFONT Contrary to METAFONT which generates bitmaps MetaPost generates encapsulated PostScript files which can be imported in LaTeX For an introduction see A User s Manual for MetaPost A very thorough discussion of LaTeX and TEX strategies for graphics and fonts can be found in TEX Unbound The picture Environment Basic Commands A picture environment is available in any LaTeX distribution without the need of loading any external package This environment is created with one of the two commands begin picture x y end picture or begin picture x y x0 yO end picture The numbers y x0 yO refer to unitlength which can be reset any time but not within a picture environment with a command such as setlength unitlength 1 2cm The default value of unitlength is ipt The first pair x y effects the reserva tion within the document of rectangular space for the picture The optional second pair zo yo assigns arbitrary coordinates to the bottom left corner of the reserved rectangle Most drawing commands have one of the two forms put object or multiput x dx dy n object B zier curves are an exception They are drawn with the command qbezier x1 1 2 2 3 y3 THE PICTURE ENVIRONMENT 209 Line Segments Line segments are drawn
229. n LaTeX commands obsolete in order to keep consistency in the final output you d better use amsmath commands whenever possible If you do so you will get an elegant output without worrying about alignment and other details keeping your source code readable If you want to use it you have to add this in the preamble usepackagefamsmath ADVANCED MATHEMATICS AMS MATH PACKAGE 141 Introducing text and dots in formulas You have been told to use mbox to insert text within formulas Amsmath provides another command for it that is text It works like mbox but it s better because it will adjust the size of the text according to the context For example if you want to write text in a subscript if you use mbox the text will remain big if you use text the text will look smaller as you would expect Amsmath defines also the dots command that is a generalization of the existing Mots You can use dots in both text and math mode and LaTeX will replace it with three dots 4 but it will decide according to the context whether to put it on the bottom like ldots or centered like cdots dot x ddot x hat x widehat x D uH Showing formulas If you want to write a formula within the text you still have to use but if you want to write a big formula on its own line then amsmath introduces lots of changes In the following sections there are all the possible ways to insert an in line formula with
230. n commands that Natbib supports listed in the table here The final area that I wish to cover about Natbib is customizing its citation style There is a command called bibpunct that can be used to override the defaults and change certain settings For example I have put the following in the preamble bibpunct F a 4 The command requires six mandatory parameters 1 The symbol for the opening bracket 2 The symbol for the closing bracket 3 The symbol that appears between multiple citations 4 This argument takes a letter e n numerical style e s numerical superscript style e any other letter author year style 5 The punctuation to appear between the author and the year in parenthetical case only 6 The punctuation used between years in multiple citations when there is a com mon author e g Chomsky 1956 1957 If you want an extra space then you need So as you can see this package is quite flexible especially as you can easily switch between different citation styles by changing a single parameter Do have a look at the Natbib manual it s a short document and you can learn even more about how to use it Chapter 8 Tables In academic writing tables are a common feature often for summarising results from research It is therefore a skill that needs mastering in order to produce good quality papers However if there is one area about LaTeX that I feel is the least intuitiv
231. n environment called thebibliography that you have to use where you want the bibliography that usually means at the very end of your document just before the end document command Here is a practical example begin thebibliography 9 45 46 CHAPTER 7 BIBLIOGRAPHY MANAGEMENT bibitem lamport94 Leslie Lamport emph LaTeX A Document Preparation System Addison Wesley Massachusetts 2nd Edition 1994 end thebibliography OK so what is going on here The first thing to notice is the establishment of the environment thebibliography is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography The optional argument which I supplied after the begin statement is telling LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed Note however that it is not a literal parameter i e the number 9 in this case but a text width Therefore I am effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character in width which means no more than nine references in total If you want more than ten then input a two digit number such as 99 which permits less than 100 references Next is the actual reference entry itself This is prefixed with the bibitem cite_key command The cite key should be a unique identifier for that particular reference and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters numbers and punctuation symbols although not a com
232. n require more involved formatting While it is possible to change the output of maketitle it can be complicated even with minor changes to the title In such cases it is often better to create the title from scratch Create the title Normally the benefit of using LaTeX instead of traditional word processing programs is that LaTeX frees you to concentrate on content by handling margins justification and other typesetting concerns On the other hand if you want to write your own title format it is exactly the opposite you have to take care of everything this time LaTeX will do nothing to help you It can be challenging to create your own title format since LaTeX was not designed to be graphically interactive in the adjustment of layout The process is similar to working with raw HTML with the added step that each time you want to see how your changes look you have to re compile the source While this may seem like a major inconvenience the benefit is that once the customized title format has been written it serves as a template for all other documents that would use the title format you have just made In other words once you have a layout you like you can use it for any other documents where you would like the same layout without any additional fiddling with layout First step since you ll be working only on the first page of your document and you ll have to compile very often you don t have to compile the whole document each time you
233. n the other hand there are certain advantages to the markup language approach e The layout fonts tables and so on are consistent throughout e Mathematical formulae can be easily typeset e Indices footnotes and references are generated easily e Your documents will be correctly structured The LaTeX like approach can be called WYSIWYM i e What You See Is What You Mean you can t see how the final version will look like while typing Instead you see the logical structure of the document LaTeX takes care of the formatting for you The LaTeX document is a plain text file containing the content of the document with additional markup When the source file is processed by the macro package it can produce documents in several formats LaTeX supports natively DVI and PDF but using other software you can easily create PostScript PNG JPG etc Skills needed LaTeX is a very easy system to learn and requires no specialist knowledge although literacy and some familiarity with the publishing process is useful It is however assumed that you are completely fluent and familiar with using your computer before you start Specifically effective use of this document requires that you already know and understand the following very thoroughly e how to use a good plain text editor not a wordprocessor like OpenOffice Word Perfect or Microsoft Word e where to find all 95 of the printable ASCII characters on your keyboard and what they me
234. n the tex directory but this is not going to happen very often Now you can write your document separating it in as many files as you want and adding many pictures without getting confused thanks to the rigid structure you gave to the project you will be able to keep track of all your edits clearly A suggestion do not call your files like chapter_01l tex or figure_03 png i e try to avoid using numbers in file names if the numbering LaTeX gives them auto matically is different from the one you gave and this will likely happen you will get really confused When naming a file stop for a second think about a short name that can fully explain what is inside the file without being ambiguous it will let you save a lot of time as soon as the document gets larger 260 CHAPTER 33 GENERAL GUIDELINES Writing your document While writing whenever you have to take a decision about formatting define your own command for it and add it to your mystyle sty let LaTeX work for you If you do so it will be very easy to change it if you change your mind Here is an example if you are writing a book about Mathematics and you have to use vectors you have to decide how they will look like T here are several different standards used in many books If a is a vector some people like to add an arrow over it d other people write it underlined a another common version is to write it bold a Let us assume you want to write your vectors with
235. n then be processed with the makeindex program Type in the command 163 164 CHAPTER 16 INDEXING line makeindex filename Note that filename is without extension the program will look for filename ida and use that You can optionally pass filename idr directly to the program as argument The makeindex program generates a sorted index with the same base file name but this time with the extension ind If now the LaTeX input file is processed again this sorted index gets included into the document at the point where LaTeX finds printindex It is common to place it at the end of the document The default index format is two columns The showidx package that comes with LaTeX prints out all index entries in the left margin of the text This is quite useful for proofreading a document and verifying the index Note that the index command can affect your layout if not used carefully Here is an example My Word index Word As opposed to Word index Word Note the My Word As opposed to Word Note the position of the full stop position of the full stop Abbreviation list You can make a list of abbreviations with the package nomencl http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib nomencl To enable the Nomenclature feature of LaTeX the nomencl package must be loaded in the preamble with usepackage lt options gt nomencl makenomenclature Issue the nomenclature lt prefix gt lt symbol gt lt descri
236. nce The optional step is the step between numbered lines the default is 1 which means every line will be numbered To use this environment remember to add usepackage moreverb to the docu ment preamble Multi line comments As we have seen the only way LaTeX allows you to add comments is by using the special character 96 that will comment out all the rest of the line after itself This approach is really time consuming if you want to insert long comments or just comment out a part of your document that you want to improve later Using the verbatim package to be loaded in the preamble as usual usepackage verbatim you can use an environment called comment that will comment out everything within itself Here is an example Note that this won t work inside complex environments like math for example You may be wondering why should I load a package called verbatim to have the possibility to add comments The answer is straightforward commented text is not interpreted by the compiler just like verbatim text the only difference is that verbatim text is introduced within the document while the comment is just dropped LIST STRUCTURES 109 This is another begin comment rather stupid but helpful This is another example for embedding comments in your document end comment example for embedding comments in your document Quoting text LaTeX provides several environments for quoting text they have small differences an
237. ncluded properly within your source file and LaTeX can t recognize them The reason is that an editor modified your document with a different encoding from the one that was used when creating it Most of the operating systems use UTF 8 as default but this could create problems if are using programs based on different libraries or different operating systems The best way to solve this problem is to change the encoding to ISO 8859 1 that includes all the letters you need Some text editors let you change the encoding in the settings Korean To use LATEX for typesetting Korean we need to solve three problems 1 We must be able to edit Korean input files Korean input files must be in plain text format but because Korean uses its own character set outside the repertoire of US ASCII they will look rather strange with a normal ASCII editor The two most widely used encodings for Korean text files are EUC KR and its upward compatible extension used in Korean MS Windows CP949 Windows 949 UHC In these encodings each US ASCII character represents its normal ASCII character similar to other ASCII compatible encodings such as ISO 8859 x EUC JP Big5 or Shift_JIS On the other hand Hangul syllables Hanjas Chinese characters as used in Korea Hangul Jamos Hiraganas Katakanas Greek and Cyrillic characters and other symbols and letters drawn from KS KOREAN 271 X 1001 are represented by two consecutive octets The first has its MSB set Until
238. nclusion of bibtex for matted citations in DokuWiki pages and displays them in APA format NATBIB 57 e BibSonomy A free social bookmark and publication management system based on BibTeX Summary Although it can take a little time to get to grips with BibTeX in the long term it s an efficient way to handle your references It s not uncommon to find bib files on websites that people compile as a list of their own publications or a survey of relevant works within a given topic etc Or in those huge online bibliography databases you often find BibTeX versions of publications so it s a quick cut and paste into your own bib file and then no more hassle Having all your references in one place can be a big advantage And having them in structured form that allows customizable output is another one There are a variety of free utilities that can load your bib files and allow you to view them in a more efficient manner as well as sort them and check for errors Natbib Using the standard LaTeX bibliography support you will see that each reference is numbered and each citation corresponds to the numbers The numeric style of citation is quite common in scientific writing In other disciplines the author year style e g Roberts 2003 such as Harvard is preferred and is in fact becoming increasingly common within scientific publications A discussion about which is best will not occur here but a possible way to get su
239. nd The second it Third The third etc item Third The third etc ldots end description paragraphs it may look odd if the descriptions are too short If you want tightly packed lists use the mdwlist package included in the mdwtools bundle which pro vides starred versions of the previous environments i e itemize enumerate and description They work exactly in the same way but the output is different Nested Lists Latex will happily allow you to insert a list environment into an existing one up to a depth of four Simply begin the appropriate environment at the desired point within the current list Latex will sort out the layout and any numbering for you l The first item a Nested item 1 begin fenumerate b Nested item 2 item The first item begin enumerate 2 The second item item Nested item 1 item Nested item 2 3 The third etc end enumerate item The second item item The third etc ldots end enumerate Customizing Lists Customizing many things in LaTeX is not really within the beginners domain While not necessarily difficult in itself because beginners are already overwhelmed with the array of commands and environments moving on to more advanced topics runs the risk of confusion However since the tutorial is on formatting I shall still include a brief guide on customizing lists Feel free to skip 112 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING Customizing Enumerated Lists The thing peop
240. nd into the preamble of your document it will influence the English language hyphenation If you place the command after the begin document and you are using some package for national language support like babel then the hyphenation hints will be active in the lan guage activated through babel The example below will allow hyphenation to be hyphenated as well as Hyphenation and it prevents FORTRAN Fortran and 95 96 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING fortran from being hyphenated at all No special characters or symbols are allowed in the argument Example hyphenation FORTRAN Hy phen a tion The command inserts a discretionary hyphen into a word This also becomes the only point hyphenation is allowed in this word This command is especially useful for words containing special characters e g accented characters because LaTeX does not automatically hyphenate words containing special characters begin minipage 2in I think this is su per cal i frag i lis tic ex pi al i do cious end minipage I think this is supercalifragi listicexpialidocious Several words can be kept together on one line with the command mbox text It causes its argument to be kept together under all circumstances Example My phone number will change soon It will be mbox 0116 291 2319 fbox is similar to mbox but in addition there will be a visible box drawn around the content Quotes Latex treats left a
241. nd multiple iden tical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it in parentheses the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known or else a unique number Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work In the combination you must combine any sections Entitled History in the vari ous original documents forming one section Entitled History likewise combine any sections Entitled Acknowledgements and any sections Entitled Dedications You must delete all sections Entitled Endorsements 6 COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents re leased under this License and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects You may extract a single document from such a collection and distribute it individ ually under this License provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document 7 AGGREGATION WITH INDE
242. nd right quotes as different entities For single quotes on British and American keyboards this symbol is found on the key adjacent to the number 1 gives a left quote mark and is the right For double quotes simply double the symbols and Latex will interpret them accordingly Although you can use the for right double quotes if you wish To quote in Latex To quote in Latex To quote in Latex To quote in Latex To quote in Latex To quote in Latex Please press the x key Please press the x key The right quote is also used for apostrophe in Latex without trouble TEXT FORMATTING 97 Command Output Command Output o o a 9 o o Q 6 O 6 1 oj v o 0 L f ct K m tyd A Accents It does not take long before you need to use an accented character within your docu ment Personally I find it tends to be names of researchers whom I wish to cite which contain accents It s easy to apply although not all are easy to remember To place an accent on top of an i or a j its dot has to be removed This is accomplished by typing i and j If you have to write all your document in a foreign language and you have to use particular accents several times then using the right configuration you can write those c
243. ne end tabular label 1 label 2 label 3 label 4 item 1 item 2 item 3 item 4 However that doesn t look quite as intended The columns are still at their natural width just wide enough to fit their contents whilst the rows are as wide as the table width specified This looks very ugly The reason for the mess is that you must also explicitly insert extra column space Fortunately LaTeX has rubber lengths which unlike others are not fixed and LaTeX can dynamically decide how long they should be So the solution to the current problem is begin tabular 0 75 textwidth extracolsep fill c clclr hline label 1 amp label 2 amp label 3 amp label 4 hline item 1 amp item 2 amp item 3 amp item 4 hline end tabular label 1 label 3 label 4 item 1 item 2 item 3 item 4 You will notice the construct added at the beginning of the column descrip tion Within it is the Vextracolsep command which requires a width A fixed width could have been used however by using a rubber length such as V ill the columns are automatically spaced evenly The tabularx package simple column stretching This package provides a table environment called tabularx which is similar to the tabular environment except that it has a new column specifier X The column s specified with this specifier will be stretched to make the table as wide as specified usepackage tabularx
244. ng of the reference attributes The first one follows immediately after the brace which is the citation key This key must be unique for all entries in your bibliography It is with this identifier that you will use within your document to cross reference it to this entry It is up to you as to how you wish to label each reference but there is a loose standard in which you use the author s surname followed by the year of publication This is the scheme that I use in this tutorial Next it should be clear that what follows are the relevant fields and data for that particular reference The field names on the left are BibTeX keywords They are 48 CHAPTER 7 BIBLIOGRAPHY MANAGEMENT followed by an equals sign where the value for that field is then placed BibTeX expects you to explicitly label the beginning and end of each value I personally use quotation marks however you also have the option of using curly braces But as you will soon see curly braces have other roles within attributes so I prefer not to use them for this job as they can get more confusing Remember that each attribute must be followed by a comma to delimit one from another You do not need to add a comma to the last attribute since the closing brace will tell BibTeX that there are no more attributes for this entry although you won t get an error if you do It can take a while to learn what the reference types are and what fields each type has avai
245. ngth of Opt Do the following before the beginning of the environment setlength columnseprule ipt This will draw a thin line of 1pt in width A thick line would not look very pleasing however you are free to put in any length of your choosing Also to change the horizontal space in between columns the default is set at 10pt which is quite narrow then you need to change the columnsep parameter setlength columnsep 20pt Manual Page Formatting There may be instances especially in very long documents such as books that Latex will not get all page breaks looking as good as it could It may therefore be necessary to manually tweak the page formatting Of course you should only do this at the very final stage of producing your document once all the content is complete Latex offers the following Summary This tutorial is relatively short largely due to the fact that the whole Latex ethos is concentrate on the content and let Latex and or other typographers who have de veloped suitable document classes decide on the best presentation The next step to achieve greater control of page layout is to set about designing your own class Unfor tunately that is not a straightforward task and is often best left to the professionals 128 CHAPTER 12 PAGE LAYOUT newline Breaks the line at the point of the command Breaks the line at the point of the command it s a shorter version of the previous command but it does
246. nse is not limited to software manuals it can be used for any textual work regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference 1 APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS 303 304 APPENDIX G GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE This License applies to any manual or other work in any medium that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License Such a notice grants a world wide royalty free license unlimited in duration to use that work under the conditions stated herein The Document below refers to any such manual or work Any member of the public is a licensee and is addressed as you You accept the license if you copy modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law A Modified Version of the Document means any work containing the Docu ment or a portion of it either copied verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document s overall subject or to related matters and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject Thus if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics a Secondary Section may
247. nt Structure T tableofcontents telephone TeX Prints TeX logo See Formatting textbf Sets bold font style See Formatting textit Sets italic font style See Formatting textmd Sets medium weight of a font See Formatting textnormal Sets normal font See Formatting textrm Sets roman font family See Formatting textsc Sets font style to small caps See Formatting textsf Sets sans serif font family See Formatting textsl Sets slanted font style See Formatting texttt Sets typewriter font family See Formatting textup Sets upright shape of a font See Formatting textwidth textheight thanks thispagestyle tiny Sets font size See Formatting title today Writes current day See Formatting Mt twocolumn typeout typein 300 APPENDIX E GLOSSARY U uline Underlines text Requires ulem package See Formatting underbrace underline unitlength usebox usecounter uwave Creates wavy underline Requires ulem package See Formatting V value vbox text Encloses a paragraph s text to prevent it from running over a page break vdots vector verb vfill vline vphantom vspace Appendix F Document Information amp History History This book was started on January 2005 on the Wikibooks project and developed on the project by the contributors listed below For convenience this PDF was created for download from the project The latest
248. nts 203 204CHAPTER 25 BEAMER PACKAGE MAKE YOUR PRESENTATIONS IN LATEX Chapter 26 Xy Xy pic is a package for typesetting graphs and diagrams developed by K H Rose and R Moore There is already a number of tutorials and or descriptions available at the internet how to use the package see for example Xy pic Typesetting graphs and diagrams in TeX which contains further links A simple diagram However in my own daily work I just need a subset of commands to create the nec cessary diagrams and therefore I will only describe those commands References e Xy pic Typesetting graphs and diagrams in TeX e K H Rose Xy pic User s Guide e K H Rose amp R Moore Xy pic Reference Manual 205 206 CHAPTER 26 XY PIC PACKAGE CREATE DIAGRAMS Chapter 27 Producing Mathematical Graphics Most people use LaTeX for typesetting their text But as the non content and structure oriented approach to authoring is so convenient LaTeX also offers the possibility for producing graphical output from textual descriptions Furthermore quite a number of La TeX extensions have been created in order to overcome these restrictions In this chapter you will learn about a few of them Overview The picture environment allows programming pictures directly in LaTeX On the one hand there are rather severe constraints as the slopes of line segments as well as the radii of circles are restricted to a narrow choice of values On the other hand
249. ny ways to influence the drawing of curves for more information check X Y pic 222 CHAPTER 27 PRODUCING MATHEMATICAL GRAPHICS documentation If you are interested a more thorough tutorial see the XY pic user s guide Alternatives In many cases especially for more advanced diagrams it may be easier to draw the graphics using external vector graphics software and then import the file into the document see Importing Graphics However most software does not support LaTeX fonts or mathematical notation which can result in ugly and inconsistent graphics A solution is to use textext a plug in for Inkscape which allows one to insert small LaTeX objects into SVG images These images can then be saved as EPS or PDF files which may then be imported into the LaTeX document proper Chapter 28 Advanced Topics Here are some topics that are not really necessary to write a proper document but could help you making your life easier and giving you some details to modify Splitting the document into multiple files As the typing goes on your LaTeX file could get big and confusing so it could be a good idea to split it into several other documents For example if you are writing a book you could consider writing every chapter in its own tex file LaTeX makes this very easy thanks to the command input filename tex While processing the document the compiler will simply read the content of filename tex and put it within the docum
250. ocessing e The La TeX encyclopaedia http tex loria fr index html e Hypertext Help with LaTeX http www giss nasa gov latex e EpsLatex a very comprehensive guide to images figures and graphics http www ctan org tex archive info epslatex pdf e The Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List in PDF http www ctan org tex archive info symbols comprehensive symbols a4 pdf e Getting to Grips with LaTeX HTML Collection of Latex tutorials taking you from the very basics towards more advanced topics http www andy roberts net misc latex index html e Chapter 8 about typesetting mathematics of the LaTeX companion http www macrotex net texbooks latexcomp ch8 pdf Reference e LaTeX Project Site e The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network Latest La TeX related packages and software e TeX Directory Structure used by many La TeX distributions e Natural Math converts natural language math formulas to LaTeX representation e Obsolete packages and commands e Lamport s book LaTeX A Document Preparation System Templates e LaTeX template for writing PhD thesis 2007 e UCL computer department thesis template e UT thesis template 2006 277 278 CHAPTER 36 LINKS Chapter 37 Authors Included books The following books have been included in this wikibook or we are working on it with permission of the author e Andy Roberts Getting to grips with Latex Done e Not So Short Introduction to LaTex2e by Tobias Oetiker H
251. ocument Most of the programs should be already within your LaTeX distribution the others come with Ghostscript which is a free and multi platform software as well 14 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Chapter 2 Absolute Beginners This tutorial is aimed at getting familiar with the bare bones of LaTeX First ensure that you have LaTeX installed on your computer see Installation for instructions of what you will need We will begin with creating the actual source LaTeX file and then take you through how to feed this through the LaTeX system to produce quality output such as postscript or PDF The LaTeX source The first thing you need to be aware of is that LaTeX uses a markup language in order to describe document structure and presentation What LaTeX does is to convert your source text combined with the markup into a high quality document For the purpose of analogy web pages work in a similar way the HTML is used to describe the document but it is your browser that presents it in its full glory with different colours fonts sizes etc The input for LaTeX is a plain ASCII text file You can create it with any text editor It contains the text of the document as well as the commands that tell LaTeX how to typeset the text For the truly impatient a minimal example looks something like the following the commands will be explained later documentclass article begin document Hello world end document Spaces
252. of the maths syntax is ignored So generally it is better to use the specific maths commands if required Note that the calligraphy example gives rather strange output This is because for letters it requires upper case characters The remaining letters are mapped to special symbols Changing text size of equations Probably a rare event but there may be a time when you would prefer to have some control of the size For example using text mode maths by default a simple fraction will look like this where as you may prefer to have it displayed larger like when in display mode but still keeping it in line like this ole A simple approach is to utilize the predefined sizes for maths elements displaystyle Size for equations in display mode textstyle Size for equations in text mode scriptstyle Size for first sub superscripts scriptscriptstyle Size for subsequent sub superscripts A classic example to see this in use is typesetting continued fractions The following code provides an example begin fequation x a_0 frac i a_1 1 _2 frac 1 a_3 a_4 end equation As you can see as the fractions continue they get smaller although they will not get any smaller as in this example they have reached the scriptstyle limit If you wanted to keep the size consistent you could declare each fraction to use the display style instead e g begin equation x _0 frac i dis
253. of your document About now you saw you can create both DVI and PDF document from the same source This is true but it gets a bit more complicated if you want to introduce images or links This will be explained in detail in the next chapters about now assume you can compile in both DVI and PDF without any problem Note in this instance due to the simplicity of the file you only need to run the LaTeX command once However if you begin to create complex documents including bibliographies and cross references etc LaTeX needs to be executed multiple times to resolve the references But this will be discussed in the future when it comes up Chapter 3 Basics Document Classes The first information LaTeX needs to know when processing an input file is the type of document the author wants to create This is specified with the documentclass command documentclass options class Here class specifies the type of document to be created The LaTeX distribution provides additional classes for other documents including letters and slides The options parameter customizes the behavior of the document class The options have to be separated by commas Example an input file for a LaTeX document could start with the line documentclass 11pt twoside a4paper article which instructs LaTeX to typeset the document as an article with a base font size of eleven points and to produce a layout suitable for double sided printing on A4 paper
254. ok about LaTeX supported by a lots of users and John Doe NOTE when the command is used with an explicit first parameter it is given enclosed with brackets a lots of users New Environments Just as with the newcommand command there is a command to create your own environments The newenvironment command uses the following syntax newenvironment name num before after EXTRA SPACE 233 Again newenvironment can have an optional argument The material specified in the before argument is processed before the text in the environment gets processed The material in the after argument gets processed when the Vend command is encountered The example below illustrates the usage of the newenvironment command newenvironment king rule 1tex 1lex hspace stretch 1 hspace stretch 1 rulef lex 1ex My humble subjects begin king My humble subjects ldots end king The num argument is used the same way as in the newcommand command LaTeX makes sure that you do not define an environment that already exists If you ever want to change an existing command you can use the renewenvironment command It uses the same syntax as the newenvironment command Extra space When creating a new environment you may easily get bitten by extra spaces creeping in which can potentially have fatal effects For example when you want to create a title environment which suppresses its o
255. on for similar types of theorems e g Theorems Lemmas and Corollaries to share a counter In this case define subsequent theorems as newtheorem name counter Printed output 153 154 CHAPTER 14 THEOREMS where counter is the name of the counter to be used Usually this will be the name of the master theorem You can also create a theorem environment that is not numbered by using the newtheorem command For instance newtheorem mydef Definition defines the mydef environment which will generate definitions without numbering This re quires amsthm package Proofs The proof environment can be used for adding the proof of a theorem The basic usage is begin proof Here is my proof end proof It just adds Proof in italics at the beginning of the text given as argument and a white square Q E D Symbol at the end of it If you are writing in another language than English just use babel with the right argument and the word Proof printed in the output will be translated accordingly anyway in the source the name of the environment remains proof If you would like to manually name the proof include the name in square brackets begin proof Proof of important theorem Here is my important proof end proof If the last line of the proof is displayed math then the Q E D symbol will appear on a subsequent empty line To put the Q E D symbol at the end of the last line use the qedhere command begin proof Here
256. only need to take a look at the first page That is why we ll first create a dummy document for preparing the title and then we ll simply include it within the existing big document we are writing Call the dummy document test title tex and put the following code in it Ndocumentclass pdftex 12pt a4paper report 39 40 CHAPTER 6 TITLE CREATION usepackage pdftex graphicx newcommand HRule rule linewidth 0 5mm begin document input title tex end document It is meant to be compiled with pdflatex to create a PDF in output It is a very basic document but take care that it has the same settings of the document you are writing so the output won t change when you include the title in your document In this case see the first line the font size is set to 12pt and the paper size is an A4 The package graphicx is included to insert an image in the title Then a command is defined called HRule it will just insert a horizontal line whose length is like the size of the paper and whose thickness is 0 5 mm If you want you can change its settings in the definition Finally the document starts and it simply includes the title tex file that must be placed in the same directory of our dummy file test_title tex Now create the title tex and write in it begin titlepage end titlepage all the things you want to put in the title must be inside the titlepage environ ment Now if you compile test_title tex you will see a
257. ons are in the making Two particularly useful commands are spanishoperators and spanishdeactivate The macro spanishoperators list of operators contains a list of spanish mathe matical operators and may be redefined at will For instance the command def spanishoperators sen only defines sen overriding all other definitions the command let spanishoperators relax disables them all This command supports accented or spaced operators For instance the following operators are stated by default lNacutefilm l acutef i m sup 1l acute i m inf mNacute a x Nacutefilnf m acute i n sen tg arc sen arc cos arc tg cotg cosec senh tgh The acute lt letter gt command puts an accent and the V command adds a small space Finally the macro spanishdeactivate list of characters disables some active characters to keep you out of trouble if they are redefined by other packages The candidates for deactivation are the set lt gt Please check the documentation for Babel or spanish dtx for further details 274 CHAPTER 35 INTERNATIONALIZATION Chapter 36 Links See in Wikipedia TeX Here are some other online resources available See in Wikipedia LaTeX Community The TeX Users Group Includes links to free versions of La TeX for many kinds of computer Newsgroup for La TeX related questions CTAN hundreds of add on packages and programs Tutorials FAQs Tobias Oetiker s Not So Short Introduction to La Tex2e ht
258. op working The best solution is to give each page a unique name by using the pagenumbering command pagenumbering alph b titlepage other front matter pagenumbering roman i ii iii iv setcounter page 1 table of contents table of figures Mpagenumbering arabic 1 2 3 4 setcounter page 1 beginning of the main matter chapter 1 By changing the page numbering every time before the counter is reset each page gets a unique name In this case the pages would be numbered a b c i ii iii iv v 1 2 3 4 5 If you don t want the page numbers to be visible for example during the front mat ter part use pagestyle empty pagestyle plain The important point is that although the numbers are not visible each page will have a unique name The problem can also occur with the algorithms package because each algorithm uses the same line numbering scheme the line identifiers for the second and follow on algorithms will be duplicates of the first Problems with Bookmarks The text displayed by bookmarks does not always look like you expect it to look Because bookmarks are just text much fewer characters are available for bookmarks than for normal LATEX text Hyperref will normally notice such problems and put up warning Package hyperref Warning Token not allowed in a PDFDocEncoded string You can now work around this problem by providing a text string for the book
259. or PDF output As LaTeX runs faster in this mode you may save yourself valuable time If you want to get the output you can simply comment out the second line textcomp provides extra symbols for example for different currencies texteuro things like textcelsius and many other theorem you can change the style of newly defined theorems For more information see the Theorems section units helps you typeset units correctly For example unitfrac 1 C s unit 1 A Automatically handles the correct spacing between the number and the unit Works in math mode as well url it defines the url command URLs often contain special character such as _ and amp in order to write them you should escape them inserting a backslash but if you write them as an argument of url you don t need to escape any special character and it will take care of proper formatting for you If you are using the hyperref you don t need to load url because it already provides the url command verbatim it improves the verbatim environment fixing some bugs More over it provides the comment environment that lets you add multiple line comments or comment out easily big parts of the code wrapfig to insert images surrounded by text It was discussed in section Floats Figures and Captions 184 CHAPTER 19 PACKAGES Chapter 20 Installing Extra Packages Most LaTeX installation
260. or example arabic TheNameForTheNewCounter Instead of arabic you could also use alph Alph roman or Roman Here is an example for recreating something similar to a section and subsection counter that already exist in LaTeX newcounter mysection newcounter mysubsection mysection addtocounter mysection 2 set them to some other numbers than 0 addtocounter mysection 10 same arabic mysection arabic mysubsection bla bla stepcounter mysection arabic mysection arabic mysubsection bla bla stepcounter mysubsection arabic mysection arabic mysubsection bla bla addtocounter mysubsection 25 arabic mysection arabic mysubsection bla bla and more bla bla 12 0 bla bla 13 0 bla bla 13 1 bla 13 26 bla bla and more bla bla 225 Creating your own package As you know you can easily include any package by the command usepackage packagename but what if you want to create your own It is very simple 1 create a simple text file called mypack sty and open it with any text editor 2 at the beginning of the text document just write ProvidesPackage mypack note it has to have the same name of the file without the extension l write whatever you want in it using all the LaTeX commands you know Nor mally you should define new commands or import other packages 2 import your new package with the known commandNusepackagetmypack the file mypack sty and the LaTeX source you are com
261. or pointing out danger or for some other reason Text mode superscript and subscript To superscript text in text mode you can use the textsuperscript command This allows you to for instance typeset 6th as 6 Michelangelo was born on March 6 textsuperscript th 1475 The primary use of subscripts within the text environment is to typeset chemical formulae For this purposes a highly recommend package is mhchem This package is easy to use and works with your text fonts rather than math fonts To insert a chemical forumula use ce with the text equivalent formula for example In your preamble add usepackage version 3 mhchem Ammonium sulphate is NH4 55O In your document Ammonium sulphate is ce NH4 2S04 Subscripting in text mode is not supported by LaTeX alone however several pack ages allow the use of the textsubscript command For instance bpchem KOMA Script2 and perhaps the most universal option since it is distributed with LaTeX fixltx2e all support this command In your preamble add usepackage fixltx2e In your document It is found that height textsubscript apple tree is different than height textsubscriptforange tree 102 CHAPTER 11 FORMATTING It is found that heightappictree is different than heightorangetrec If you do not load a package that supports textsubscript the math mode must be used This is easily accomplished in running text by bracketing your text
262. ort or long and other typographical niceties most of which you can ignore until later Unlike other systems which try to hide unevennesses in the text usually unsuccessfully by interfering with the letterspacing LaTeX takes the view that the author or editor should be able to contribute While it is certainly possible to set LaTeX s parameters so that the spacing is sufficiently sloppy that you will almost never get a warning about badly fitting lines or pages you will almost certainly just be delaying matters until you start to get complaints from your readers or publishers Examples Only a few common error messages are given here those most likely to be encountered by beginners If you find another error message not shown here and it s not clear what you should do ask for help Most error messages are self explanatory but be aware that the place where LaTeX spots and reports an error may be later in the file than the place where it actually occurred For example if you forget to close a curly brace which encloses say italics LaTeX won t report this until something else occurs which can t happen until the curly brace is encountered e g the end of the document Some errors can only be righted by humans who can read and understand what the document is supposed to mean or look like Newcomers should remember to check the list of special characters a very large number of errors when you are learning LaTeX are due to accidentally t
263. orts them some don t and they will only cause grief and tears with TeX Make filenames as short or as long as you wish but strictly avoid spaces Stick to upper and lower case letters without accents A Z and a z the digits 0 9 the hyphen and the full point or period similar to the conventions for a Web URL it will let you refer to TeX files over the Web more easily and make your files more portable 25 tex LaTeX or TeX input file It can be compiled with latex sty LaTeX Macro package This is a file you can load into your LaTeX document using the usepackage command dtx Documented TeX This is the main distribution format for LaTeX style files If you process a dtx file you get documented macro code of the LaTeX package contained in the dtx file ins The installer for the files contained in the matching dtx file If you download a LaTeX package from the net you will normally get a dtx and a ins file Run LaTeX on the ins file to unpack the dtx file cls Class files define what your document looks like They are selected with the documentclass command fd Font description file telling LaTeX about new fonts dvi Device Independent File This is the main result of a LaTeX compile run with latex You can look at its content with a DVI previewer program or you can send it to a printer with dvips or a similar application pdf Portable
264. ou can change this in the same way as any other length To turn off indentation completely set it to zero but you still have to provide units it s still a measure setlength parindent 0in If you do this though and leave parskip set to zero your readers won t be able to tell easily where each paragraph begins If you want to use the style of having no indentation with a space between paragraphs use the parskip package which does it for you and makes adjustments to the spacing of lists and other structures which use paragraph spacing so they don t get too far apart THE DOCUMENT ENVIRONMENT 33 Table of contents All auto numbered headings get entered in the Table of Contents ToC automati cally You don t have to print a ToC but if you want to just add the command tableofcontents at the point where you want it printed usually after the Abstract or Summary Entries for the ToC are recorded each time you process your document and re produced the next time you process it so you need to re run LATEX one extra time to ensure that all ToC pagenumber references are correctly calculated We ve already seen how to use the optional argument to the sectioning commands to add text to the ToC which is slightly different from the one printed in the body of the document It is also possible to add extra lines to the ToC to force extra or unnumbered section headings to be included The commands listoffigures and listoftabl
265. output The result of this conversion will create myfile rtf which you may open in many modern word processors Microsoft Word users can save this file as a myfile doc to use features included with that program such as Track changes Conversion to HTML There are many converters to HTML One option is the HEVEA program LaTeX hevea mylatexfile BibTeX bibtex2html mybibtexfile TeX4ht TeX4ht is a very powerful conversion program but its configuration is not straight forward Basically a configuration file has to be prepared and then the program is called Conversion to image formats PNG To convert from PDF open your file with GIMP It will ask you which page you want to convert whether you want to use anti aliasing choose strong if you want to get 264 CHAPTER 34 EXPORT TO OTHER FORMATS something similar to what you see on the screen Try different resolutions to fit your needs but 100 dpi should be enough Once you have the image within GIMP you can post process it as you like and save it to any format supported by GIMP as PNG for example A method for DVI files is dvipng usage is the same as dvipdfm Also the convert command from the ImageMagick suite can convert both DVI and PDF files to PNG You can optimize the resulting image using optipng so that it will take up less space SVG Convert it to PS as described before then use the bash script ps2svg sh it could be possible to write a step by step
266. p footskip All the arguments can be both positive and negative numbers they will be added keeping the sign to the relative variable cite assists in citation management 182 CHAPTER 19 PACKAGES color it adds support for colored text For more information see the relative section eucal other mathematical symbols fancyhdr to change header and footer of any page of the document It is described in the Page Layout section fontenc to choose the font encoding of the output text You might need it if you are writing documents in a language other than English Check in the Internationalization section geometry for easy management of document margins graphicx to manage external pictures hyperref it gives LaTeX the possibility to manage links within the docu ment or to any URL when you compile in PDF For more infor mation see the relative section indentfirst once loaded the beginning of any chapter section is indented by the usual paragraph indentation inputenc to choose the encoding of the input text You might need it if you are writing documents in a language other than English Check in the Internationalization section latexsym other mathematical symbols listings to insert programming code within the document Many lan guages are supported and the output can be customized For more information see the relative section ma
267. package top tlength bottom blength left llength right rlength geometry e Edit individual page dimension variables described above using the addtolength and setlength commands For instance Noddsidemargin 1cm setlength textwidth 6 5in addtolength voffset 5pt Additionally there are several packages designed to solve the problem of varying pages sizes which override any defaults setup by the document class One of the most versatile packages for page layout is the geometry package For instance to set the page size add the following to your preamble usepackage a4paper geometry The geometry package has many pre defined page sizes like a4paper built in Others include aOpaper aipaper a6paper bOpaper bipaper b6paper letterpaper legalpaper executivepaper Page Orientation When you talk about changing page orientation it usually means changing to land scape mode since portrait is the default I shall introduce two slightly different styles of changing orientation The first is for when you want all of your document to be in landscape from the very beginning There are various packages available to achieve this but the one I prefer is the geometry package All you need to do is call the package with landscape as an option usepackage landscape geometry Although if you intend to use geometry to set your paper size don t add the usepackage commands twice simply string all the option
268. piling must be in the same directory It will be like that all you have written within your package were within the document itself It is also possible to create your own style file Similar to the creation of your own package you can call your own style file in the preamble of any document by the command documentclass mystyle The name of the style file is then mystyle cls and can be opened with any text editor At the beginning of this file the following lines have to be provided ProvidesClass mystyle again withing the style files other files or packages are imported by the requirepackage command See also http tex loria fr general new clsguide html Using different paths When referring to an external file in the LaTeX document source if you just write a filename the compiler will look for it in the same directory of the source In general you can refer to any document on your hardisk using both relative and absolute paths In general you might want to make your source portable to another computer or to a different location of you hardisk so always use relative paths A relative path is always defined in terms of the current directory where you are running the compiler ie the directory where the source you are compiling is LaTeX uses the standard nix notation with a simple dot you refer to the current directory and by two dots you refer to the previous directory that is the upper one in the file system tree By a slash
269. playstyle a 1 frac 1 displaystyle a_2 frac 1 displaystyle a_3 a_4 end equation BASIC MATHEMATICS PLAIN LATEX 137 2 i 1 a4 Another approach is to use the DeclareMathSizes command to select your pre ferred sizes You can only define sizes for displaystyle textstyle etc One potential downside is that this command sets the global maths sizes as it can only be used in the document preamble However it s fairly easy to use DeclareMathSizes ds ts ss sss where ds is the display size ts is the text size etc The values you input are assumed to be point pt size NB the changes only take place if the value in the first argument matches the current document text size It is therefore common to see a set of declarations in the preamble in the event of the main font being changed E g DeclareMathSizes 10 18 12 8 4 For size 10 text DeclareMathSizes 11 19 13 9 4 For size 11 text DeclareMathSizes 12 20 14 10 For size 12 text Plus and minus signs Latex deals with the and signs in two possible ways The most common is as a binary operator When two maths elements appear either side of the sign it is assumed to be a binary operator and as such allocates some space either side of the sign The alternative way is a sign designation This is when you state whether a mathematical quantity is either positive or negative This is common for the latter as
270. ple cite citation01 citation02 citation03 The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets No Cite If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography but not where it is referenced in the main text then the nocite command can be used for example Lamport showed in 1995 something nocite lamport95 BibTeX I have previously introduced the idea of embedding references at the end of the doc ument and then using the cite command to cite them within the text In this tutorial I want to do a little better than this method as it s not as flexible as it could be Which is why I wish to concentrate on using BibTeX A BibTeX database is stored as a bib file It is a plain text file and so can be viewed and edited easily The structure of the file is also quite simple An example of a BibTeX entry article greenwade93 author George D Greenwade title The C omprehensive T ex A rchive N etwork CTAN year 1993 journal TUGBoat volume 14 number 3 pages 342 351 Each entry begins with the declaration of the reference type in the form of type BibTeX knows of practically all types you can think of common ones such as book article and for papers presented at conferences there is inproceedings etc In this example I have referred to an article within a journal After the type you must have a left curly brace to signify the beginni
271. prule for the uppermost rule or line midrule for the rules appearing in the middle of the table such as under the header and bottomrule for the lowermost rule This ensures that the rule weight and spacing are acceptable In addition cmidrule can be used for mid rules that span specified columns The following example contrasts the use of booktabs and normal LaTeX im plementations the later example requires usepackage booktabs in the preamble Normal LaTeX begin tabular llr hline multicolumn 2 c Item cline 1 2 Animal amp Description amp Price hline Gnat amp per gram amp 13 65 NN amp each amp 0 01 NN Gnu amp stuffed amp 92 50 NN Emu amp stuffed amp 33 33 NN NEED MORE COMPLICATED FEATURES Armadillo amp frozen amp 8 99 NN hline end tabular Item Animal Description Price Gnat per gram 13 65 each 0 01 anu stuffed 92 50 Emu stuffed 33 33 Armadillo frozen 8 99 Using booktabs begin tabular llr toprule multicolumn 2 c Item cmidrule r 1 2 Animal amp Description amp Price midrule Gnat amp per gram amp 13 65 NN amp each amp 0 01 Gnu amp stuffed amp 92 50 NN Emu amp stuffed amp 33 33 NN Armadillo amp frozen amp 8 99 bottomrule end tabular Item Animal Description Price Gnat per gram 13 65 each 0 01 Gnu stuffed 92 50 Emu stuffed 33 33 Armadillo frozen 8 99 Need more complicated feat
272. ption gt command for each symbol you want to have included in the nomenclature list The best place for this command is immediately after you introduce the symbol for the first time Put printnomenclature at the place you want to have your nomenclature list Run LaTeX 2 times then makeindex filename nlo s nomencl ist o filename nls followed by running LaTeX once again MULTIPLE INDEXES 165 Multiple indexes If you need multiple indexes you can use the package multind http www tex ac uk cgi bin texfaq2html label multind This package provides the same commands as makeidx but now you also have to pass a name as the first argument to every command usepackage multind makeindex books makeindex authors index books A book to index index fauthors Put this author in the index printindex books The Books index printindex authors The Authors index 166 CHAPTER 16 INDEXING Chapter 17 Algorithms and Pseudocode LaTeX has a variety of packages that can help to format algorithms and pseudocode Pseudocode is a loose way of expressing an algorithm in a way which resembles typical computer programming languages It doesn t have much of a formal standardisation but uses only very common programming structures such as if else blocks and for loops Typesetting using the algorithmic package The algorithmic environment provides a number of popular constructs for algorithm designs The comman
273. put In other words you can redefine the square root this way only if you are not going to use multiple roots in the whole document A new ont command If you are writing about Mathematics you might need a symbol similar to Voint but with the double integral within the circle Some LaTeX packages e g esint provide 252 CHAPTER 32 TIPS AND TRICKS this symbol by the command Voiint but using such a package usually affect the output of all the formulas within your document Since you want to keep the elegant style of LaTeX you d better find a way to have a new oiint without using such packages The only way to do it is by defining it by your own The best approach would be to define another command using basic TeX but by LaTeX is more straightforward Note that we will not use the AMSmath package so everything will work in any LaTeX document The symbols we will use are the integral int f and a big circle bigcirc More QO over we have to be able to move those symbols on the right or on the left the command hspace 1cm will introduce an horizontal space of 1 cm it is possible to introduce negative spaces thus moving an object on the left We ll get the symbol we want with the following command bigcirc hspace 1 4em int hspace 8em int The value of the negative spaces to add have been chosen after several attempts By using the relative unit em it is quite flexible It seems to work correctly for font sizes
274. r reading e meta Help Displaying a formula Wikimedia uses a subset of LaTeX commands External links e Latex maths symbols e amsmath documentation 152 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS Chapter 14 Theorems With theorem we can mean any kind of labelled enunciation that we want to look separated from the rest of the text and with sequential numbers next to it This approach is commonly used for theorems in mathematics but can be used for anything LaTeX provides a command that will let you easily define any theorem like enunciation Basic theorems The easiest is the following newtheorem name Printed output put it in the preamble The first argument is the name you will use to reference it the sec ond argument is the output LaTeX will print whenever you use it For example newtheorem mydef Definition will define the mydef environment if you use it like this begin mydef Here is a new definition end mydef It will look like this Definition 3 Here is a new definition with line breaks separating it from the rest of the text Theorem counters Often the counters are determined by section for example Theorem 2 3 refers to the 3rd theorem in the 2nd section of a document In this case specify the theorem as follows newtheorem name Printed output numberby where numberby specifies the section level at which the numbering is to take place By default each theorem uses its own counter However it is comm
275. re than one way to skin a cat There are a set of formatting commands very similar to the font formatting ones just used except they are aimed specifically for text in maths mode So why bother showing you textrm and co if there are equivalents for maths Well that s because they are subtly different The maths formatting commands are LaTeX command Sample Description Common use mathnormal ABCDEFabcde f 123456 the default math most mathematical no font tation mathrm ABCDEFabcdef123456 this is the default or units of measurement normal font unital one word functions icised mathit ABCDEFabcdef123456 italicised font mathbf ABCDEFabcdef123456 bold font vectors mathsf ABCDEFabcdef123456 Sans serif mathtt ABCDEFabcdef 123456 Monospace fixed width font mathcal ABCDEZTA 1oo 3A s calligraphy often used for sheaves schemes and categories Waathfrak ABCD EFabcdef123456 Fraktur Almost canonical font for Lie algebras mathbb ABCDEFOUKFEF LA Blackboard bold Used to denote special sets e g real num bers mathscr Script The maths formatting commands can be wrapped around the entire equation and not just on the textual elements they only format letters numbers and uppercase lrequires amsfonts or amssymb packages 2require mathrsfs package 136 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS Greek and the rest
276. ries without a key Replace regular expression Import preferences Export preferences Figure 31 3 Specify default key pattern in JabRef JabRef is highly flexible and can be configured in many details We make the following changes to the default configuration of JabRef to simplify our work First we specify the default pattern for BibTeX keys so that JabRef can automatically generate keys in our desired format This can be done by selecting Options amp rarr Preferences amp rarr Key pattern and modifying the desired pattern in the field Default pattern For instance we use auth lower shortyear to get the last name of the first author in lower case and the last two digits of the year of the publication see figure 31 3 Second we add the BibTeX field location for information about the location MANAGING COLLABORATIVE BIBLIOGRAPHIES 245 RSet general fields 2 General fields General crossref keywords doi url citeseerurl pdf comment owner location timestamp Abstract abstract Review review Delimit fields with semicolon ex url pdf note OK Default Figure 31 4 Set up general fields in JabRef where the publication is available as hard copy e g a book or a copy of an article This field can contain the name of the user who has the hard copy and where he has it or the name of a library and the shelf
277. ritten in the International Phonetic Alpha bet Unfortunately there is ambiguity among authors as to whether this transcription is tex or tex the vowel is thus pronounced either as the ay of words such as way hay bay former case or as the e of words such as bet met let latter and more frequent case What is LaTeX LaTeX pronounced either Lah tech la tex or less often Lay tech le tex is a macro package based on TeX created by Leslie Lamport Its purpose is to simplify Inttp tex loria fr general texbook tex 10 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TeX typesetting especially for documents containing mathematical formulae It is currently maintained by the LaTeX3 project Many later authors have contributed extensions called packages or styles to LaTeX Some of these are bundled with most TeX LaTeX software distributions more can be found in the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network CTAN Since LaTeX comprises a group of TeX commands LaTeX document processing is essentially programming You create a text file in LaTeX markup The LaTeX macro reads this to produce the final document Clearly this has disadvantages in comparison with a WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get program such as Openoffice org Writer or Microsoft Word e You can t see the final result straight away e You need to know the necessary commands for LaTeX markup e It can sometimes be difficult to obtain a certain look O
278. rlinks too The package provides three useful commands for inserting links pointing outside the document e 1 1 link text this will have the same effect as ref label_name but will make the text link text a full link instead The two can be combined for example in we use hyperref mainlemma lemma ref mainlemma If the lemma labelled as mainlemma was number 4 1 1 then the outputted text would be we use lemma 4 1 1 with the hyperlink as expected 191 192 CHAPTER 22 HYPERREF PACKAGE e url my_ur1 it will show the URL using a mono spaced font and if you click on it your browser will be opened pointing at it e href my_url1 description it will show the string description using stan dard document font but if you click on it your browser will be opened pointing at my_url Here is an example url http www wikibooks org href http www wikibooks org wikibooks home both point at the same page but in the first case the URL will be shown while in the second case the URL will be hidden Note that if you print your document the link stored using href will not be shown anywhere in the document You can use relative paths to link documents near the location of your current document in order to do so use the standard unix like notation is the current directory is the previous directory etc A possible way to insert emails is by textbackslas
279. rves is not satisfactory At least 8 are needed The figure again shows the effect of the linethickness command on horizontal or vertical lines and of the thinlines and the thicklines commands on oblique line segments It also shows that both kinds of commands affect quadratic B zier curves each command overriding all previous ones Let 21 41 P 2 denote the end points and mi m the respective slopes of a quadratic B zier curve The intermediate control point S x y is then given by the equations 102 1 gm maz3 maizi ya y1i yi milz 21 1 2 See Graphics in LaTeX 2e for a Java program which generates the necessary qbezier command line THE PICTURE ENVIRONMENT 217 Catenary setlength unitlength 1cm begin picture 4 3 3 6 2 5 0 25 put 2 0 vector 1 0 4 4 put 2 45 05 x put 0 0 vector 0 1 3 2 put 0 3 35 makebox 0 0 y qbezier 0 0 0 0 1 2384 0 0 y 2 0 2 7622 Nqbezier 0 0 0 0 1 2384 0 0 2 0 2 7622 linethickness 075mm multiput 2 0 1 0 5 line 0 1 3 multiput 2 0 0 1 4 line 1 0 4 e linethickness 2mm put 3 12763 line 1 0 4 put 5 07237 line 0 1 4 put 7 12763 line 1 0 4 put 5 07237 line 0 1 4 put 8 54308 line 1 0 4 put 1 34308 line 0 1 4 put 1 2 54308 line 1 0 4 pu
280. ry Sectioning Commands The commands for inserting sections are fairly intuitive Of course certain commands are appropriate to different document classes For example a book has chapters but an article doesn t Here is an edited version of some of the structure commands in use from simple tez section Introduction This section s content section Structure This section s content subsection Top Matter This subsection s content subsubsection Article Information This subsubsection s content As you can see the commands are fairly intuitive Notice that you do not need to specify section numbers LaTeX will sort that out for you Also for sections you do not need to markup which content belongs to a given block using begin and end commands for example LaTeX provides 7 levels of depth for defining sections All the titles of the sections are added automatically to the table of contents if you decide to insert one But if you make manual styling changes to your heading for example a very long title or some special line breaks or unusual font play this would appear in the Table of Contents as well which you almost certainly don t want LATEX allows you to give an optional extra version of the heading text which only gets used in the Table of Contents and any running heads if they are in effect This optional alternative heading goes in square brackets before the curly braces THE DOCUMENT ENVI
281. s You can use any string as argument of label but these prefixes become increasingly useful as your document grows in size Another suggestion try to avoid using numbers within labels You are better off describing what the object is about This way if you change the order of the objects you will not be obliged to reference random pointless numbers If you want to be able to see the markers you are using in the output document as well you can use the showkeys package this can be very useful while developing your document For more information see the Packages section Examples Here are some practical examples but you will notice that they are all the same because they all use the same commands Sections 1 Greetings Hello section Greetings label sec greetings 2 Referencing Hello I greeted in section 1 section Referencing I greeted in section ref sec greetings EXAMPLES 159 you could place the label anywhere in the section anyway in order to avoid con fusion it is better to place it immediately after the beginning of the section Note how the marker starts with sec as suggested before The label is then referenced in a different section Pictures You can reference a picture by inserting it in the figure floating environment begin figure centering includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth gul1 caption Close up of a gull Mabel gull end figure Figure ref gull shows a photograph of
282. s LaTeX that content of the document is about to commence Any thing above this command is known generally to belong in the preamble Hello World This was the only actual line containing real content the text that we wanted displayed on the page end document The document environment ends here It tells LaTeX that the document source is complete anything after this line will be ignored As we have said before each of the LaTeX commands begin with a backslash This is LaTeX s way of knowing that whenever it sees a backslash to expect some commands Comments are not classed as a command since all they tell LaTeX is to ignore the line Comments never affect the output of the document Generating the document It is clearly not going to be the most exciting document you have ever seen but we want to see it nonetheless I am assuming that you are at a command prompt already in the directory where hello tex is stored 20 CHAPTER 2 ABSOLUTE BEGINNERS 1 Type the command latex hello the tex extension is not required although you can include it if you wish 2 Various bits of info about LaTeX and its progress will be displayed If all went well the last two lines displayed in the console will be Output written on hello dvi 1 page 232 bytes Transcript written on hello log This means that your source file has been processed and the resulting document is called hello dvi which takes
283. s come with a large set of pre installed style packages but many more are available on the net The main place to look for style packages on the Internet is CTAN http www ctan org Once you have identified a package you need and haven t already got or you have got it and need to update it use the indexes on any CTAN server to find the package you need and the directory where it can be downloaded from Downloading packages What you need to look for is always two files one ending in dtx and the other in ins The first is DOCTeX file which combines the package program and its documentation in a single file The second is the installation routine much smaller You must always download both files If the two files are not there it means one of two things e Either the package is part of a much larger bundle which you shouldn t normally update unless you change version of LaTeX e or it s one of a few rare or unusual packages still supplied as a single sty file intended for the now obsolete LaTeX 2 09 Download both files to a temporary directory There will often be a readme txt with a brief description of the package You should of course read this file first Installing a package There are four steps to installing a LaTeX package 1 Extract the files Run LaTeX on the ins file That is open the file in your editor and process it as if it were a LaTeX document which it is or if you prefer type latex followed by the
284. s file sty tex latex packagename Style file the normal package content bst bibtex bst packagename BibTeX style mf fonts source public typeface METAFONT outline fd tex latex mfnfss Font Definition files for METAFONT fonts fd tex latex psnfss Font Definition files for PostScript Type 1 fonts pfb fonts typel foundry typeface PostScript Type 1 outline afm fonts afm foundry typeface Adobe Font Metrics for Type 1 fonts tfm fonts tfm foundry typeface TeX Font Metrics for METAFONT and Type 1 fonts vf fonts vf foundry typeface TeX virtual fonts dvi doc package documentation pdf doc package documentation others tex latex packagename other types of file unless instructed oth erwise Table 20 1 Where to put files from packages 188 CHAPTER 20 INSTALLING EXTRA PACKAGES Chapter 21 Color The package color adds the support for colored text LaTeX does not support it by default The best approach is to define the colors you want to use at the beginning of your document and then you can reference them whenever you want For example you can use them to type colored text or as an argument of another package that supports colors as arguments for example see the listings package There are some standard colors that are already defined within the package they are white black red green blue cyan magenta yellow you can reference them simply typing their name You can define your own colors with def inecolor n
285. s of words can be squeezed or stretched as to exactly fill a line on the page I admit this is a very simplistic version of what really happens but the point is that TeX operates on glue and boxes Letters are not the only things that can be boxes You can put virtually everything into a box including other boxes Each box will then be handled by LATEX as if it were a single letter In the past chapters you have already encountered some boxes although I did not tell you The tabular environment and the includegraphics for example both produce a box This means that you can easily arrange two tables or images side by side You just have to make sure that their combined width is not larger than the textwidth You can also pack a paragraph of your choice into a box with either the parbox pos width text command or the begin minipage pos width text end minipage environment The pos parameter can take one of the letters c t or b to control the vertical alignment of the box relative to the baseline of the surrounding text width takes a length argument specifying the width of the box The main difference between a minipage and a parbox is that you cannot use all commands and environments inside a parbox while almost anything is possible in a minipage While parbox packs up a whole paragraph doing line breaking and everything there is also a class of boxing commands that operates only on horizontally aligned material We already
286. s onto the page In continental Europe paragraphs are often 236 CHAPTER 30 CUSTOMIZING LATEX separated by some space and not indented But beware this also has its effect on the table of contents Its lines get spaced more loosely now as well To avoid this you might want to move the two commands from the preamble into your document to some place below the command tableofcontents or to not use them at all because you ll find that most professional books use indenting and not spacing to separate paragraphs If you want to indent a paragraph that is not indented you can use indent at the beginning of the paragraph Obviously this will only have an effect when parindent is not set to zero If you want to indent the beginning of every section you can use the indentfirst package see the chapter about LaTeX Packages for more information To create a non indented paragraph you can use noindent as the first command of the paragraph This might come in handy when you start a document with body text and not with a sectioning command Horizontal Space LATEX determines the spaces between words and sentences automatically To add horizontal space use hspace length If such a space should be kept even if it falls at the end or the start of a line use hspace instead of hspace The length in the simplest case is just a number plus a unit e g hspace 1 5 cm For a list of the possible units see the Useful Measurement Macros appendix
287. s together separating with a comma PAGE STYLES 121 usepackage a4paper landscape geometry The second method is for when you are writing a document in portrait but you have some contents like a large diagram or table that would be displayed better on a landscape page However you still want the consistency of your headers and footers appearing the same place as the other pages The 1scape package is for this very purpose It supplies a landscape environment and anything inside is basically rotated No actual page dimensions are changed This approach is more applicable to books or reports than to typical academic publications Using pdflscape instead of 1scape when generating a PDF document will make the page appear right side up when viewed the single page that is in landscape format will be rotated while the rest will be left in portrait orientation Also to get a table to appear correctly on a landscaped page one must place the tabular environment inside a table environment which is itself inside the landscape environment e g it should look like this begin landscape begin table centering optional probably makes it look better to have it centered on the page begin tabular end tabular end table end landscape Page Styles Page styles in Latex terms refers not to page dimensions but to the running headers and footers of a document You may have noticed that in every example document produced
288. s way 1 create a directory only for the project We ll refer to that in the following parts as the root directory 2 create two other directories inside the root one for LaTeX documents the other one for images Since you ll have to write their name quite often choose short names A suggestion would be simply tex and img 3 create your document we ll call it document tex but you can use the name you prefer and your own package for example mystyle sty this second file will help you to keep the code cleaner If you followed all those steps these files should be in your root directory using for each directory document tex mystyle sty tex img nothing else 257 258 CHAPTER 33 GENERAL GUIDELINES The file mystyle sty Instead of putting all the packages you need at the beginning of your document as you could the best way is to load all the packages you need inside another dummy package called mystyle you will create just for your document The good point of doing this is that you will just have to add one single usepackage in your document keeping your code much cleaner Moreover all the info about your style will be within one file so when you will start another document you ll just have to copy that file and include it properly so you ll have exactly the same style you have used Creating your own style is very simple create a file called mystyle sty you could name it as you wish but it has
289. should be directories full of dvi files one for every package installed This location is distribution specific but is typically found in Distribution Path MikTeX C Program Files MikTeX 2 7 doc latex teTeX usr share texmf tetex doc latex Generally most of the packages are in the latex subdirectory although other pack ages such as BibTeX and font packages are found in other subdirectories in doc The documentation directories have the same name of the package e g amsmath which generally have one or more relevant documents in a variety of formats dvi txt pdf etc The documents generally have the same name as the package but there are ex ceptions for example the documentation for amsmath is found at latex amsmath amsdoc dvi PACKAGES LIST 181 If your installation procedure has not installed the documentation the DVI files can all be downloaded from CTAN Before using a package you should read the docu mentation carefully especially the subsection usually called User Interface which describes the commands the package makes available You cannot just guess and hope it will work you have to read it and find out Packages list Here is a not complete list of useful packages that can be used for a wide range of different kind of documents Each package has a short description next to it and when available there is a link to a section describing such package in detail All of them unless stat
290. solution is primarily based on the version control system Subversion http subversion tigris org The Wikibook describes how Subversion can be used together with several other software tools and LaTeX packages to organise the collaborative preparation of LaTeX documents Introduction The collaborative preparation of documents requires a considerable amount of coordi nation among the authors This coordination can be organised in many different ways where the best way depends on the specific circumstances In this Wikibook I describe how the collaborative writing of LaTeX documents is organised at our department Division of Agricultural Policy Department of Agri cultural Economics University of Kiel Germany I present our software tools and describe how we use them Thus this Wikibook provides some ideas and hints that will be useful for other LaTeX users who prepare documents together with their co authors 237 238 CHAPTER 31 COLLABORATIVE WRITING OF LATEX DOCUMENTS Interchanging Documents There are many ways to interchange documents among authors One possibility is to compose documents by interchanging e mail messages This method has the advan tage that common users generally do not have to install and learn the usage of any extra software because virtually all authors have an e mail account Furthermore the author who has modified the document can easily attach the document and explain the changes by e mail as well Un
291. systems allow a very effective quality assurance mea sure all authors should critically review their own modifications before they commit them to the repository see figure 31 2 The differences between the user s working copy and the repository can be easily inspected with a single Subversion command or with one or two clicks in a graphical Subversion client Furthermore authors should verify that their code can be compiled flawlessly before they commit their modifica tions to the repository Otherwise the co authors have to pay for these mistakes when they want to compile the document However this directive is not only reasonable for version control systems but also for all other ways to interchange documents among authors Subversion has a feature called Keyword Substitution that includes dynamic ver sion information about a file e g the revision number or the last author into the con MANAGING COLLABORATIVE BIBLIOGRAPHIES 243 tents of the file itself see e g http svnbook red bean com chapter 3 Sometimes it is useful to include these information not only as a comment in the LaTeX source code but also in the compiled DVI PS or PDF document This can be achieved with the LaTeX packages svn http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib suninfo http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib svninfo or prefer ably sun multi http www ctan org tex archive macros latex contrib svn multi
292. t 1 34308 line 0 1 4 put 1 3 1 35241 line 1 0 4 put 1 5 1 15241 line 0 1 4 put 1 7 1 35241 line 1 0 4 put 1 5 1 15241 line 0 1 4 put 2 5 0 25 circle 0 2 end picture In this figure each symmetric half of the catenary y cosh x 1 is approximated by a quadratic B zier curve The right half of the curve ends in the point 2 2 7622 the slope there having the value m 3 6269 Using again equation we can calculate the intermediate control points They turn out to be 1 2384 0 and 1 2384 0 The crosses indicate points of the real catenary The error is barely noticeable being less than one percent This example points out the use of the optional argument of the begin picture command The picture is defined in convenient mathematical coordinates whereas by the command begin picture 4 3 3 6 2 5 0 25 its lower left corner marked by the black disk is assigned the coordinates 2 5 0 25 218 CHAPTER 27 PRODUCING MATHEMATICAL GRAPHICS Plotting graphs setlength unitlength 0 8cm begin picture 6 4 3 2 put 2 5 0 vector 1 0 5 put 2 7 0 1 chi put 0 1 5 vector 0 1 3 multiput 2 5 1 0 4 0 13 line 1 0 0 2 multiput 2 5 1 0 4 0 13 line 1 0 0 2 put 0 2 1 4 beta v c tanh chi qbezier 0 0 0 8853 0 8853 2 0 9640 qbezier 0 0 0 8853 0 8853 2 0 9640 put 3 2 circ
293. t 40 30 circle 3 put 40 30 circle 4 put 40 30 circle 5 put 40 30 circle 6 put 40 30 circle 7 put 40 30 circle 8 put 40 30 circle 9 put 40 30 circle 10 put 40 30 circle 11 put 40 30 circle 12 put 40 30 circle 13 put 40 30 circle 14 put 15 10 circle 1 put 20 10 circle 2 put 25 10 circle 3 put 30 10 circle 4 put 35 10 circle 5 end picture There is also a possibility within the picture environment If one is not afraid of doing the necessary calculations or leaving them to a program arbitrary circles and ellipses can be patched together from quadratic B zier curves See Graphics in LaTeX 2e for examples and Java source files Text and formulas As this example shows text and formulas can be written environment with the put command in the usual way 212 CHAPTER 27 PRODUCING MATHEMATICAL GRAPHICS setlength unitlength 0 8cm begin picture 6 5 thicklines put 1 0 5 line 2 1 3 put 4 2 line 2 1 2 put 2 3 line 2 5 1 put 0 7 0 3 A 3 put 4 05 1 9 B Mput 1 7 2 95 C put 3 1 2 5 a put 1 3 1 7 b put 2 5 1 05 c put 0 3 4 F sqrt s s a 5 0 8 put 3 5 0 4 displaystyle s frac atbtc 2 end picture multiput and linethickness The command multiput x dy n object
294. t documents trunk contains a subdirectory for each text document A slightly different version a branch of a text document e g for presentation at a conference can be prepared either in an additional subdirectory of trunk or in a new subdirectory of branches When a text document is submitted to a journal or a conference we create a tag in the directory tags so that it is easy to identify the submitted version of the document at a later date This feature has been proven very useful When creating branches and tags it is important always to use the Subversion client and not the tools of the local file system for these actions because this saves disk space on the server and it preserves information about the same history of these documents Often the question arises which files should be put under version control Gener ally all files that are directly modified by the user and that are necessary for compiling the document should be included in the version control system Typically these are the LaTeX source code tex files the main document and possibly some subdocu ments and all pictures that are inserted in the document eps jpg png and pdf files All LaTeX classes cls LaTeX styles sty BibTeX data bases bib and BibTeX styles bst generally should be hosted in the repository of the common texmf tree but they could be included in the respective repository if SUBVERSION REALLY MAKES THE DIFFERENCE 24
295. t place sometimes causes confusion especially if your TeX installation is old or does not conform to the TeX Directory Structure For a TDS conformant system this is either a for LaTeX packages a suitably named subdirectory of texnf local tex latex or b a suitably named sub directory of texmf local for files like BIBTeX styles which are not just for LaTeX but can be used in other TeX systems Suitably named means sensible and meaningful and probably short For a package like paralist for example I d call the directory paralist Often there is just a sty file to move but in the case of complex packages there may be more and they may belong in different locations For example new BibTeX packages or font packages will typically have several files to install This is why it is a good idea to create a sub directory for the package rather than dump the files into misc along with other unrelated stuff If there are configuration or other files read the documentation to find out if there is a special or preferred location to move them to 4 Update your index Finally run your TeX indexer program to update the package database This program comes with every modern version of TeX and is variously called depending on the LaTeX distribution you use Read the documentation that came with your installation to find out which it is e teTeX fpTeX texhash e web2c mktexlsr e MikTeX initexmf update fndb or use the GUI This last step
296. t then derives the typographical form of the text according to the rules given in the document class file and in various style files LaTeX allows users to structure their documents with a variety of hierarchal constructs including chapters sections subsections and paragraphs The document environment After the Document Class Declaration the text of your document is enclosed between two commands which identify the beginning and end of the actual document documentclass 11pt a4paper oneside report begin document end document You would put your text where the dots are The reason for marking off the beginning of your text is that LaTeX allows you to insert extra setup specifications before it where the blank line is in the example above we ll be using this soon The reason for marking off the end of your text is to provide a place for LaTeX to be programmed to do extra stuff automatically at the end of the document like making an index A useful side effect of marking the end of the document text is that you can store comments or temporary text underneath the end document in the knowledge that LaTeX will never try to typeset them 27 28 CHAPTER 4 DOCUMENT STRUCTURE end document Don t forget to get the extra chapter from Jim Preamble The preamble is everything from the start of the Latex source file until the begin document command It normally contains commands that affect the entire document
297. task All commands to set up the new float must be placed in the preamble and not within the document 1 Add usepackage float to the preamble of your document 2 Declare your new float using newfloat type placement ext outer counter where e type the new name you wish to call your float in this instance program e placement t b p or h as previously described in Placement where letters enumerate permitted placements e ext the file name extension of an auxiliary file for the list of figures or whatever Latex writes the captions to this file e outer counter the presence of this parameter indicates that the counter associated with this new float should depend on outer counter for example chapter 3 The default name that appears at the start of the caption is the type If you wish to alter this use floatname type floatname 4 Changing float style can be issued with floatstyle style Works on all subsequent newfloat commands therefore must be inserted before newfloat to be effective e plain the normal style for Latex floats i e nothing e boxed a box is drawn that surrounds the float and the caption is printed below e ruled the caption appears above the float with rules immediately above and below Then the float contents followed by a final horizontal rule An example document using a new program float type documentclassarticle usepackagefloat floatst
298. te paths graphicspath does make your file less portable while using relative paths like the last example you shouldn t have any problem with portability but remember not to use spaces in file names Images as figures There is one major topic missing from this chapter that is relevant and that is to do with making that image a figure For this you will want a caption and maybe cross reference However this was deliberate as it is not only images that are figures Therefore this material is to be covered within its own tutorial see Floats Figures and Captions Xfig Vector graphics can be created using Xfig see Installation and exported for La TeX Once your graphic is saved as an test fig file you need to export it using the FILE gt EXPORT drop down menu from the main Xfig window and then selecting the Combined PS Latex both parts in the language drop down list If you don t change any other settings two files will be created in the same directory as test fig file such as test pstex_t and test pstex The figure can then be placed in a LaTeX document begin figure begin center input xfig test pstex_t 82 CHAPTER 9 IMPORTING GRAPHICS caption This is the caption of my figure label fig test end center end figure Chapter 10 Floats Figures and Captions In the previous chapter the importing of graphics was introduced However just having a picture stuck in between paragraphs does not
299. th you can define a special type of column which will wrap around the text as in a normal paragraph You can pass the width using any unit supported by LaTeX such as pt and cm or command lengths such as textwidth You can find a complete list in appendix Useful Measurement Macros The optional parameter pos can be used to specify the vertical position of the table relative to the baseline of the surrounding text You can use the following letters bottom center top jalo In the first line you have pointed out how many columns you want their alignment and the vertical lines to separate them Once in the environment you have to introduce the text you want separating between cells and introducing new lines The commands you have to use are the following amp column separator start new row additional space may be specified after using square brackets such as VV 6pt hline horizontal line cline i j partial horizontal line beginning in column and ending in column J Note any white space inserted between these commands is purely down to ones preferences I personally add spaces between to make it easier to read Basic examples This example shows how to create a simple table in LaTeX It is a three by three table but without any lines begin tabular 1 cr 1 2 3 1 amp 2 amp 3NN 4 5 6 4 amp 5 amp 6 7 8 9 7T amp 8 amp 9 NN end tabular Expanding
300. th environment begin displaymath environment X end displaymath environment A addcontentsline file sec unit entry adds an entry to the specified list or table addtocontents file text adds text or formatting commands directly to the file that generates the specified list or table addtocounter counter value increments the counter address Return address addtolength len cmd len increments a length command see Useful Measure ment Macros addvspace adds a vertical space of a specified height alph causes the current value of a specified counter to be printed in alphabetic characters appendix changes the way sectional units are numbered so that information after the command is considered part of the appendix arabic causes the current value of a specified counter to be printed in Arabic numbers author declares the author s See Document Structure B backslash prints a backslash baselineskip a length command see Useful Measurement Macros which specifies the minimum space between the bottom of two successive lines in a paragraph baselinestretch scales the value of baselineskip bf Boldface typeface bibitem generates a labeled entry for the bibliography bigskipamount bigskip equivalent to vspace bigskipamount boldmath bold font in math mode 293 C cal Calligraphic style in math mode caption generate caption for figures and tables Centered dots centering Us
301. th the author and super visor names properly aligned I used a trick I created two small minipages one on left and one on the right Their width is a bit less than half of page width as you can see they are exactly 40 of the text width Within the minipages I have used different alignments Using 11 I could write the date exactly at the bottom of the page As you can see the code looks dirtier than standard LaTeX source because you have to take care of the output as well If you start changing font s output it will get more confused but you can do it it s only for the title and your complicated code will be isolated from all the rest within its own file title tex Insert it in your document Once you have your title tex ready simply place it in the folder of your docu ment and insert it with input title tex Don t forget to add the commands usepackage pdftex graphicx and newcommand HRule rule linewidth 0 5mm otherwise you might get an error So the beginning of your document should look like usepackage pdftex graphicx newcommand HRule rule linewidth 0 5mm begin document input title tex tableofcontents Chapter 7 Bibliography Management For any academic research writing incorporating your references into your document is an important task Fortunately as LaTeX was aimed for this sort of work it has a variety of features that make dealing with your references much simpler
302. the label Chapter 16 Indexing A useful feature of many books index is an alphabetical list of words and expressions with the pages of the book upon which they are to be found LaTeX supports the creation of indices with its package makeidx and its support program makeindex called on some systems makeidx To enable the indexing feature of LaTeX the makeidx package must be loaded in the preamble with usepackage makeidx and the special indexing commands must be enabled by putting the Nnakeindex command into the input file preamble The content of the index is specified with index key where key is the index entry You enter the index commands at the points in the text that you want the final index entries to point to Below are examples of index entries Example Index Entry Comment indexfhello hello 1 Plain entry indexfhello Peter Peter 3 Subentry under hello index Sam textsl Sam Sam 2 Formatted entry index Lin textbf Lin Lin 7 Same as above index Jenny textbf Jenny 3 Formatted page number index Joe textit Joe 5 Same as above index ecole ecole cole 4 Handling of accents index Peter seef hello Peter see hello Cross references When the input file is processed with LaTeX each index command writes an appropriate index entry together with the current page number to a special file The file has the same name as the LaTeX input file but a different extension idx This idx file ca
303. the integral b symbols will be handled like limits and they will look like f a If you want to write multiple line subscripts you have to use substack This is particularly useful for sums but you could need it for integrals as well Just place substack as subscript and put in the argument the output you want Within the argument of substack you are allowed to use to start a new line All the lines you introduce will be centered Here is an example Pu sum_ substack De 3 O lt i lt m O lt i lt m 0 j n PCi j Math operators There are operators such as sin cos Mog that LaTeX handles in a special way it prints them in roman instead of italics and leaves the right space before and af ter them There are lot but you might want to make your own With amsmath it is very easy just use the following command it is explained with an example LIST OF MATHEMATICAL SYMBOLS 149 DeclareMathOperator ustep ustep the first argument is the command you de fine the second one is the text it will print LaTeX will take care of font formatting and spacing There is also a starred version DeclareMathOperator it works the same but the operator you define will be handled like Mim so the subscripts will be placed under the operator instead of the bottom right like all the others Fractions and binomials Besides the standard frac command to add fractions amsmath adds two new com mands They use the
304. the output produced by some existing command may not meet your requirements In this chapter I will try to give some hints on how to teach LaTeX new tricks and how to make it produce output that looks different from what is provided by default New commands To add your own commands use the newcommand name num definition com mand Basically the command requires two arguments the name of the command you want to create and the definition of the command The num argument in square brackets is optional and specifies the number of arguments the new command takes up to 9 are possible If missing it defaults to 0 i e no argument allowed The following two examples should help you to get the idea The first example defines a new command called wbal that will print The Wikibook about LaTeX Such a command could come in handy if you had to write the title of this book over and over again newcommand wbal The Wikibook about LaTeX This is wbal Mdots wbal This is The Wikibook about LaTeX The Wikibook about LaTeX The next example illustrates how to define a new command that takes one argu ment The 1 tag gets replaced by the argument you specify If you wanted to use more than one argument use 2 and so on these arguments are added in an extra set of brackets 231 232 CHAPTER 30 CUSTOMIZING LATEX newcommand wbalsup 1 This is the Wikibook about LaTeX supported by 1 n
305. the source to the desired output This is largely hidden to the user but because of all the complexity of the referencing of citations from your source LaTeX file to the database entries in another file you actually need multiple passes to accomplish the task This means you have to run LaTeX a number of times where each pass it will perform a particular task until it has managed to resolve all the citation references Here s what you need to type 1 latex latex source code doesn t require tex extension 2 bibtex latex source code Do NOT use tex extension 3 latex latex source code doesn t require tex extension 4 latex latex source code doesn t require tex extension After the first LaTeX run you will see errors such as LaTeX Warning Citation lamport94 on page 1 undefined on input line 21 LaTeX Warning There were undefined references The next step is to run bibtex on that same LaTeX source and not on the actual bib file to then define all the references within that document You should see output like the following This is BibTeX Version 0 99c Web2C 7 3 1 The top level auxiliary file latex source code aux The style file plain bst Database file 1 sample bib The third step which is invoking LaTeX for the second time will see more errors like LaTeX Warning Label s may have changed Rerun to get cross references right Don t be alarmed it s almost complete As you can guess all you have to do
306. thm to your document s preamble It is entered into by begin falgorithm caption lt your caption for this algorithm gt label lt your label for references later in your document gt begin falgorithmic lt algorithmic environment gt 170 CHAPTER 17 ALGORITHMS AND PSEUDOCODE end algorithmic end algorithm Algorithm numbering The default numbering system for the algorithm package is to number algorithms sequentially This is often not desirable particularly in large documents where num bering according to chapter is more appropriate The official documentation is not very clear on how to change this but it can be done by inserting a numberwithin into the preamble usepackage algorithmic usepackage falgorithm numberwithin algorithm chapter lt chapter section etc depending on what is required When using hyperref and referencing algorithms latex gives an error Undefined control sequence argument algorithm M theHalgorithm This can be solved adding at the preamble newcommand theHalgorithm arabic algorithm List of algorithms When you use figures or tables you can add a list of them close to the table of contents the algorithm package provides a similar command Just put listofalgorithms anywhere in the document and LaTeX will print a list of the algorithm environments in the document with the corresponding page and the caption An example from the manual This is an
307. thrsfs other mathematical symbols rotating It lets you rotate any kind of object It is particularly useful for rotating tables For more information see the relative section setspace has the doublespacing command for making double spaced doc uments showkeys it is very useful while writing any document If you want to ref erence an image or a formula you have to give it a name using label and then you can recall it using ref When you compile the document these will be replaced only with num bers and you can t know which label you had used unless you take a look at the source If you have loaded the showkeys package you will see the label just next or above the relative number in the compiled version An example of a reference to a section is sec mylabel 1n section i M OTCOVOT This way you can eas ily keep track of the labels you add or use simply looking at the preview both dvi or pdf Just before the final version remove it showidx it prints out all index entries in the left margin of the text This is quite useful for proofreading a document and verifying the index For more information see the Indexing section PACKAGES LIST 183 syntonly if you add the following code in your preamble usepackage syntonly syntaxonly LaTeX skims through your document only checking for proper syntax and usage of the commands but doesn t produce any DVI
308. tio This can be set to either true or false When true it will scale the image according to both height and width but will not distort the image so that neither width or height are exceeded scale xx Scales the image by the desired scale factor e g 0 5 to reduce by half or 2 to double angle xx This option can rotate the image by zx degrees anti clockwise trim l b r t This option will crop the imported image by l from the left b from the bottom r from the right and from the top Where 1 b r and t are lengths clip For the trim option to work you must set clip true In order to use more than one option at a time simply separate with a comma Included graphics will be inserted just there where you placed the code and the compiler will handle them as big boxes As we will see in the next section this may lead to a bad output so you d better place graphics inside floating objects Examples OK it s time to see graphicx in action Here are some examples includegraphics chick This simply imports the image without any other processing However it is very large so I won t display it here So let s scale it down This has now reduced by half If you wish to be more specific and give actual lengths of the image dimensions this is how to go about it One can also specify the scale with respect to the width of a line in the local environment linewidth the width of the text on a p
309. to end with sty Write at the beginning ProvidesPackage mystyle Then add all the packages you want with the standard command usepackage as you would do normally change the value of all the variables you want etc It will work like the code you put here would be copied and pasted within your document For a list of several packages you can use see the List of Packages section The main document document tex Then create a file called document tex this will be the main file the one you will compile even if you shouldn t need to edit it very often because you will be working on other files It should be looking like this it s the sample code for a report but you might easily change it for an article or whatever else ifx pdfoutput undefined If you are running latex then documentclass 12pt a4paper report put here packages only for the DVI usepackage dvips graphicx else else you are running pdflatex documentclass pdftex 12pt a4paper article 4 put here packages only for the PDF usepackage pdftex graphicx DeclareGraphicsExtensions pdf png jpg mps usepackagefhyperref fi put all the other packages here usepackage mystyle begin document input tex title tex 7 maketitle THE MAIN DOCUMENT DOCUMENT TEX 259 Ntableofcontents listoffigures listoftables input tex intro tex input tex main_part tex input tex conclusions tex appendix inp
310. tor Jab Ref and a file server for the PDF files of publications in the data base The usage of three different tools for one task is rather challenging for infrequent users and users that are not familiar with these tools Furthermore the file server can be only accessed by local users Therefore we consider to implement an integrated server so lution like WIKINDX http wikindx sourceforge net Aigaion http www aigaion nl or refBASE http refbase sourceforge net Using this solu tion only requires a computer with internet access and a web browser which makes the usage of our data base considerably easier for infrequent users Moreover the stored PDF files are available not only from within the department but throughout the world Depending on the copy rights of the stored PDF files the access to the server or least the access to the PDF files has to be restricted to members of the department Even Non LaTeX users of our department might benefit from a server based solution because it should be easier to use this bibliographic data base in other word processing software packages because these servers provide the data not only in BibTeX format but also in other formats All readers are encouraged to contribute to this wikibook by adding further hints or ideas or by providing further solutions to the problem of collaborative writing of LaTeX documents Acknowledgements Arne Henningsen thanks Francisco Reinaldo and G
311. tp www ctan org tex archive info lshort english lshort pdf also at http people ee ethz ch oetiker lshort lshort pdf Peter Flynn s beginner s guide formatting http www ctan org tex archive info beginlatex beginlatex 3 6 pdf The AMS Short Math Guide for LaTeX a concise summary of math formula typesetting features lt br gt http www ams org tex amslatex html amsmath users guide PDF and related files http www ctan org tex archive macros latex required amslatex math LaTeX Primer from the Indian TeX Users Group http sarovar org projects ltxprimer LaTeX Primer http www maths tcd ie dwilkins LaTeXPrimer PS Iricks fancy graphics exploiting PDF capabilities http sarovar org projects pstricks 275 276 CHAPTER 36 LINKS e PDFScreen create LaTeX PDF files that have navigation buttons used for pre sentations http sarovar org projects pdfscreen e David Bausum s list of TeX primitives these are the fundamental commands used in TeX http www tug org utilities plain cseq html e Leslie Lamport s manual for the commands that are unique to LaTeX commands not used in plain TeX http www tex uniyar ac ru doc latex2e pdf e The UK TeX FAQ List of questions and answers that are frequently posted at comp text tex http www tex ac uk faq e TeX on Mac OS X Guide to using TeX and LaTeX on a Mac http www rna nl tex html e Text Processing using LaTeX http www h eng cam ac uk help tpl textpr
312. ts and this will give you your matrix For a simple 2x2 matrix Meft beginfarray 1 amp 2 1 2 3 amp 4 i end array right M 134 CHAPTER 13 MATHEMATICS Arrays are very flexible here is an example of another matrix like structure p left beginfarray c lc 1 amp 2 hline 314 3 amp 4 end array right M Adding text to equations The math environment differs from the text environment in the representation of text Here is an example of trying to represent text within the math environment M 50 apples times 100 apples lots of apples 2 M 50apples x 100apples lotso f apples There are two noticeable problems Firstly there are no spaces between numbers and text nor spaces between multiple words Secondly the words don t look quite right the letters are more spaced out than normal Both issues are simply artifacts of the maths mode in that it doesn t expect to see words Any spaces that you type in maths mode are ignored and Latex spaces elements according to its own rules It is assumed that any characters represent variable names To emphasize that each symbol is an individual they are not positioned as closely together as with normal text There are a number of ways that text can be added properly The typical way is to wrap the text with the mbox command This command hasn t been introduced before however its job is basically to create a text box just wide enough to
313. ts of his book on Wikibooks He agreed his work is still protected 279 280 CHAPTER 37 AUTHORS but you are allowed to copy the parts you want on this Wikibook If you see text on both the original work and here then that part and only that part is released under the terms of GFDL like any other text here on Wikibooks Working Wiki users Major contributors to the book on Wikibooks are e Alessio Damato e Jtwdog Appendix A Installation Installing LaTeX is not a simple one click download and install Multiple programs often need to be downloaded and installed in order to have a suitable computer system that can be used to create publishable output such as PDFs The basic requirement is to have TeX and LaTeX Optional and recommended installations include an attrac tive editor to write LaTeX source documents this is probably where you will spend most of your time and a bibliographic management program to manage references TeX and LaTeX TeX and LaTeX are available for most computer platforms since they were programed to be very portable They are most commonly installed using a distribution such as teTeX MiKTeX or MacTeX This however does not include any editor or advanced graphical user interface Other programs that are not part of the distribution are used to write and prepare TeX and LaTeX files UNIX Linux UNIX and Linux users have a wide choice of distributions the most common are teTeX and Te
314. ture it will automatically keep track of the numbering of figures so you do not need to include this within the caption text The location of the caption is traditionally underneath the float However it is up to you to therefore insert the caption command after the actual contents of the float but still within the environment If you place it before then the caption will appear above the float Iry out the following example to demonstrate this effect Ndocumentclass a4paper 12pt article usepackage english babel usepackage graphicx begin document begin figure h caption A picture of a gull centering includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth gul1 end figure begin figure h centering reflectbox includegraphics width 0 5 textwidth gul1 caption A picture of the same gull looking the other way end figure begin table h begin center begin tabular 1 c r hline 1 amp 2 amp 3N 4 amp 5 amp 6N 7T amp 8 amp 9 NN hline 86 CHAPTER 10 FLOATS FIGURES AND CAPTIONS end tabular end center caption A simple table end table Notice how the tables and figures have independent counters end document Figure 1 A picture of a gull Figure 2 A picture of the same gull looking the other way ame e Table 1 A simple table Notice how the tables and figures have independent counters note that the command reflectbox flips horizontally
315. ty html svn advanced props special eol style There is also another important reason for reducing the number of ineffective modifications if several authors work on the same file the probability that the same line is modified by two or more authors at the same time increases with the number of modified lines Hence ineffective modifications unnecessarily increase the risk of conflicts see section Interchanging Documents tmp lt gt tmp 2 KDIffs File Edit Directory Movement Diffview Merge Window Settings Help Fed MAR em ae nove FFA the version control system tries to merge all modifications automatically Only if two or more authors have modified the same line the modifications cannot be merged automatically which of the two changes should be kept Authors can also comment their modifications so that the co authors can easily understand the workflow of this file tmp tmp 2 Top line 96 the version control system tries to merge all modifications automatically Only if two or more authors have modified the same line the modifications ca resolve this confl which of the two changes should be kept Authors can also comment their modifications so that the co authors can easily understand the workflow of this file 4 4 Number of remaining unsolved conflicts 9 of which 0 are whitespace Figure 31 2 Reviewing modifications in K Diffs Furthermore version control
316. ubert Partl and Irene Hyna We have contacted the authors by email asking for permission they allowed us to use their material but they never edited directly this wikibook That book is released under the GPL that is not compatible with the GFDL used here in Wikibooks Anyway we have the permission of the authors to use their work You can freely copy text from that guide to here If you find text on both the original book and here on Wikibooks then that text is double licensed under GPL and GFDL For more information about Tobias Oetiker and Hubert Partl their websites are http it oetiker ch and http homepage boku ac at partl respectively Done e Peter Flynn s Formatting information a beginner s guide to typesetting with LaTeX We have contacted him by email asking for permission to use his work The original book is released under the GNU Free Documentation License the same as Wikibooks For more information his personal website is http imbolc ucc ie pflynn Working e LaTeX Primer from the Indian TeX Users Group Their document is released under the GNU Free Documentation License the same as Wikibooks so we can include parts of their document as we wish In any case we have contacted Indian TeX Users Group and they allowed us to do it Working e David Wilkins Getting started with LaTeX The book is not released under any free license but we have contacted the author asking him for the permission to use par
317. uld be avoided In this sense it is very important not to change the positions of line breaks without cause Hence automatic line wrapping of the users LaTeX editors should be turned off and line breaks should be added manually Otherwise if a single word in the beginning of a paragraph is added or removed all line breaks of this paragraph might change so that most diff tools indicate the entire paragraph as modified because they compare the files line by line The diff tools wdiff http www gnu org software wdiff and dwdiff http os ghalkes nl dwdiff html are not affected by the positions of line breaks because they compare documents word by word However their output is less clear so that modifications are more difficult to track Moreover these tools cannot be used directly with the Subversion command line switch diff cmd but a small wrapper script has to be used http textsnippets com posts show 1033 A reasonable convention is to add a line break after each sentence and start each new sentence in a new line Note that this has an advantage also beyond version control if you want to find a sentence in your LaTeX code that you have seen in a compiled DVI PS or PDF file or on a printout you can easily identify the first few words of this sentence and screen for these words on the left border of your editor window Furthermore we split long sentences into several lines so that each line has at most 80 characters because it
318. umdepth 1 A related counter is tocdepth which specifies what depth to take the Table of Contents to It can be reset in exactly the same way as secnumdepth For example setcounter tocdepth 3 To get an unnumbered section heading which does not go into the Table of Contents follow the command name with an asterisk before the opening curly brace subsection Introduction All the divisional commands from part to subparagraph have this starred version which can be used on special occasions for an unnumbered heading when the setting of secnumdepth would normally mean it would be numbered If you want the unnumbered section to be in the table of contents anyway use the addcontentsline command like this section Introduction addcontentsline toc section Introduction Appendices The separate numbering of appendices is also supported by LaTeX The appendix macro can be used to indicate that following sections or chapters are to be numbered as appendices 32 CHAPTER 4 DOCUMENT STRUCTURE In the report or book classes this gives Nappendix chapter First Appendix For the article class use appendix section First Appendix Ordinary paragraphs After section headings comes your text Just type it and leave a blank line between paragraphs That s all LaTeX needs The blank line means start a new paragraph here it does not mean you get a blank line in the typeset output The spacing between paragraphs
319. upon that by including some vertical lines THE TABULAR ENVIRONMENT 61 begin tabular 1 c Ilr 3 1 amp 2 amp 3 SESS 4 amp 5 amp 6 Viper 7 amp 8 amp 9 NN end tabular To add horizontal lines to the very top and bottom edges of the table begin tabular 1 c l r hline 1 amp 2 amp 3 4 amp 5 amp 6NN T amp 8 amp 9 NN hline end tabular 96 tn N oo a And finally to add lines between all rows as well as centering notice the use of the center environment of course the result of this is not obvious from the preview on this web page begin center begin tabular 1 1 r hline 1 amp 2 amp hline 4 amp 5 amp 6 NN hline 7T amp 8 amp 9 NN hline end tabular end center 62 CHAPTER 8 TABLES begin tabular r 1 hexadecimal hline 3700 octal amp hexadecimal 11111000000 3700 amp octal cline 2 2 11111000000 amp binary 1984 hline hline 1984 amp decimal hline end tabular Column specification using gt cmd and lt cmd Using the array package one is able to alter the column specification This is done in the argument of the tabular environment using gt command for commands exe cuted right before each column element The code lt command for commands to be executed right after each column element As an example to get a column in math mode enter begin tabu
320. ures Have a look at one of the following packages e hhline do whatever you want with horizontal lines e array gives you more freedom on how to define columns e colortbl make your table more colorful e supertab for tables that need to stretch over several pages 74 CHAPTER 8 TABLES e longtable same as above Note footnotes do not work properly in a normal tabular environment If you replace it with a longtable environment footnotes work properly e xtabular Yet another package for tables that need to span many pages e tabulary modified tabular allowing width of columns set for equal heights Summary This concludes discussion of basic tables Experimentation quickly leads to mastery While the table syntax in LaTeX can look rather messy seeing new examples can look confusing But hopefully enough has been covered here so that a user can create any table needed for your papers Unsurprisingly LaTeX has plenty more up its sleeve so expect a follow up tutorial covering more advanced features in the near future Chapter 9 Importing Graphics Strictly speaking LaTeX cannot manage pictures directly in order to introduce graph ics within documents LaTeX just creates a box with the same size of the image you want to include and embeds the picture without any other processing This means you will have to take care that the images you want to include are in the right format to be included This is not such a hard task because
321. used on Internet digital cameras etc They are the best choice if you want to insert photos e PNG very common format even if not as much as JPG it s a lossless format and it s the best choice for diagrams if you were not able to generate a vector version e PDF it is widely used for documents but can be used to store images as well It supports both vector and bit map images but if you want to store bit maps you d better use JPG or PNG they need less disk space JPG and PNG are supported by any image processing program so you just have to use the one you prefer If you want to create high quality vector PDF to embed within your PDF document you can use Inkscape it supports many vector formats and so you can use it convert from one to other You could also create your graphics directly with Inkscape If you want to make mathematical plots then Gnuplot can save in any format Note that EPS files can not be used with pdflatex however they can be converted to PDF using epstopdf included in most LaTeX distributions In Windows multiple files can be converted by placing the following line in a batch file a text file with a BAT extension in the same directory as the images for 44f in eps do epstopdf Af which can then be run from the command line Images can be saved in multiple formats for different purposes For example a directory can have diagram pdf for high resolution printing while diagram png can
322. ust use the appropriate encoding for your system If you are using Linux use usepackage ut 8 inputenc Spanish To enable Spanish writing besides installing the appropriate hyphenation patterns you type usepackage spanish babel The trick is that Spanish has several options and commands changing the layout The options may be loaded either at the call to Babel after calling spanish or be fore defining the spanishoptions macro So the following commands are roughly equivalent def spanishoptions mexico usepackage spanish babel SPANISH 273 usepackage spanish mexico babe1 On average the former syntax should be preferred as the latter is a deviation from standard Babel behavior and thus may break other programs LyX latex2rtf2e interacting with LaTeX Two particularly useful options are es noquoting es nolists some packages and classes are known to collide with Spanish in the way they handle active characters and these options disable the internal workings of Spanish to allow you to overcome these common pitfalls Moreover these options may simplify the way LyX customizes some features of the Spanish layout from inside the GUI The options mexico mexico com provide support for local custom in Mexico the former using decimal dot as customary and the latter allowing decimal comma as required by the Mexican Official Norm NOM of the Department of Economy for labels in foods and goods More localizati
323. ut tex myappendix tex Bibliography Nclearpage addcontentsline toc chapter Bibliography input tex mybibliography tex end document Here a lot of code expressed in previous sections has been used At the beginning there is the header discussed in the Tips amp Tricks section so you will be able to compile in both DVI and PDF Then you import the only package you need that is your mystyle sty note that in the code it has to be imported without the extension then your document starts Then it inserts the title we don t like the output of maketitle so we created our own the code for it will be in a file called title tex in the folder called tex we created before How to write it is explained in the Title Creation section Then tables of contents figure and tables are inserted If you don t want them just comment out those lines Then the main part of the document in inserted As you can see there is no text in document tex everything is in other files in the tex directory so that you can easily edit them We are separating our text from the structural code so we are improving the What You See is What You Mean nature of LaTeX Then we can see the appendix and finally the Bibliography It is in a separated file and it is manually added to the table of contents using a tip suggested in the Tips amp Tricks Once you created your document tex you won t need to edit it anymore unless you want to add other files i
324. ve of the principal authors of the Document all of its principal authors if it has fewer than five unless they release you from this requirement C State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version as the publisher D Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document E Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices F Include immediately after the copyright notices a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License in the form shown in the Addendum below G Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document s license notice H Include an unaltered copy of this License 307 I Preserve the section Entitled History Preserve its Title and add to it an item stating at least the title year new authors and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page If there is no section Entitled History in the Document create one stating the title year authors and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence J Preserve the network location if any given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on T
325. verbatim Note once in the verbatim environment the only command that will be recognized is end verbatim Any others will be output verbatim If this is an issue then you can use the alltt package instead providing an environment with the same name Nbeginfalltt Verbatim extended with the ability to use normal commands Therefore it is possible to emph emphasize words in this environment for example end alltt Verbatim extended with the ability to use normal commands Therefore it is possible to emphasize words in this environment for example Remember to add usepackage alltt to your preamble to use it though Within the alltt environment you can use the command normalfont to get back the normal font If you just want to introduce a short verbatim phrase you don t need to use the whole environment but you have the verb command verbtmy text The first character following verb is the delimiter here we have used but you can use any character you like but and space verb will print verba tim all the text after it until it finds the next delimiter For example the code verb textbf Hi mate will print textbf Hi mate ignoring the effect textbf should have on text For more control over formatting however you can try the fancyvrb package which provides a Verbatim environment note the capital letter which lets you draw a rule round the verbatim text change the font size and even have typo
326. vironment represents the table more conceptually This explains why it isn t tabular but table that provides for captioning because the caption isn t displayed in the grid like layout A table environment has a lot of similarities with a figure environment in the way the floating is handled etc For instance you can specify its placement in the page with the option placement the valid values are where the table is declared here like in the example above at the top of the page this is the default at the bottom of the page on a dedicated page of floats table environment is also useful when you want to have a list of tables at the beginning or end of your document with the command listoftables it enables making cross references to the table with You may refer to table Nref my table for an example begin table begin tabular end tabular caption An example of table label my_table end table The tabular environment controlling table width This is basically a slight extension on the original tabular version although it requires an extra argument before the column descriptions to specify the preferred width of the table THE TABULARX PACKAGE SIMPLE COLUMN STRETCHING 71 begin tabular 0 75 textwidth cl clcl r hline label 1 amp label 2 amp label 3 amp label 4 hline item 1 amp item 2 amp item 3 amp item 4 hli
327. which will then modify the page dimensions accordingly The standard document classes that are a part of Latex are built to be fairly generic which is why you have the flexibility of specifying the page size Other classes may have different options or none at all Normally 3rd party classes come with some documentation to let you know Readers from a word processing background are probably thinking why there is so much white space surrounding the text There is a good reason and it s all down to readability Have a look in a few books and pick a few lines at random Count the number of characters per line I bet the average is about 66 Studies have shown that it s easier to read text when there are 60 70 characters per line and it would seem 120 CHAPTER 12 PAGE LAYOUT that 66 is the optimal number Therefore the page margins are set to ensure that readability remains as good as possible Also white space is often left in the inner margin for the assumption that the document will be bound If you wish to change the margins of your document there are many ways to do SO e Simply use the fullpage package for somewhat standardized smaller margins usepackage fullpage e Use the a4wide package for a page with A4 document size with smaller margins e Use the geometry package This package allows you to specify the 4 margins without needing to remember the particular page dimensions commands It may be implemented as follows use
328. with so it will be easy to find in the document As you may have noticed reading how it works it is a two step process first the compiler has to store the labels with the right number to be used for referencing then it has to replace the ref with the right number That is why when you use references you have to compile your document twice to see the proper output If you compile it only once LaTeX will use the older information it collected in previous compilations that might be outdated but the compiler will inform you printing on the screen at the end of the compilation LaTeX Warning Label s may have changed Rerun to get cross references right Using the command pageref you can help the reader to find the referenced object by providing also the page number where it can be found You could write something like See figure ref fig test on page pageref fig test 157 158 CHAPTER 15 LABELS AND CROSS REFERENCING Since you can use exactly the same commands to reference almost anything you might get a bit confused after you have introduced a lot of references It is common practice among LaTeX users to add a few letters to the label to describe what you are referencing Here is an example chap chapter Sec section fig figure tab table eq equation Following this convention the label of a figure will look like label fig my_ figure etc You are not obliged to use these prefixe
329. wn indentation as well as the one on the following paragraph The ignorespaces command in the begin block of the environment will make it ignore any space after executing the begin block The end block is a bit more tricky as special processing occurs at the end of an environment With the ignorespacesafterend LaTeX will issue an ignorespaces after the special end processing has occurred newenvironment simple noindent See the space poc Mee to the left begin simple See the space to the left end simple Same here 234 CHAPTER 30 CUSTOMIZING LATEX newenvironment correct noindent ignorespaces par noindent No space ignorespacesafterend to the left begin correct Same No space to the left here end correct Same here Command line LaTeX If you work on a Unix like OS you might be using Makefiles or any kind of script to build your LaTeX projects In that connection it might be interesting to produce dif ferent versions of the same document by calling LaTeX with command line parameters If you add the following structure to your document usepackage ifthen ifthenelse equal blackandwhite true black and white mode do something M color mode do something different Now you can call LaTeX like this latex newcommand blackandwhite true input test tex First the command blackandwhite gets defined and then
330. xam ple of such a BibTeX entry http scholar google com scholar bib hl en amp lr amp output search amp q info iO0XAsGZMSHsJ scholar google com amp output citation amp oe ASCII amp oi citation Helpful Tools e Referencer Referencer is a Gnome application to organise documents or refer ences and ultimately generate a BibTeX bibliography file BIBTEX 55 R JabRef File Edit View BibTeX Tools Websearch Options Help Daut Sores AHAN EIE 126 E LEE _ x hovedbase bib references bib Author 4 Title Year Journal Timestam Search All Fields Anderson et al Metabolic stoichiometry and the fate of excess carbon and nutrients i 2005 The American 2005 09 Ando and Kobayashi Positional distribution of docosahexaenoic acid in triacyl sn glycero 2004 Aquaculture Re Ando et al Positional distribution of n 3 highly unsaturated fatty acids in triacyl 2004 Aquaculture Incremental Ang and Petrell Pellet wastage and subsurface and surface feeding behaviours associ 1998 Aquacultural E Float j Anon Tall og fakta 2005 S tatistikkbilag til FHL s rsrapport 2005 2006 09 o Filter Cj Anras and Lagard re Measuring cultured fish swimming behaviour first results on rainbow 2004
331. yleruled newfloatprogramthplop floatnameprogramProgram begindocument 94 CHAPTER 10 FLOATS FIGURES AND CAPTIONS beginprogram beginverbatim class HelloWorldApp public static void main String args Display the string System out println Hello World endverbatim captionThe Hello World program in Java P prog endprogram prog enddocument Program 1 The Hello World program in Java class HelloWorldApp public static void main String args i Display the string System out println Hello World The verbatim environment is an environment that is already part of Latex Al though not introduced so far its name is fairly intuitive Latex will reproduce every thing you give it including new lines spaces etc It is good for source code but if you want to introduce a lot of code you might consider using the listings package that was made just for it Summary That concludes all the fundamentals of floats You will hopefully see how much easier it is to let Latex do all the hard work and tweak the page layouts in order to get your figures in the best place As always the fact that Latex takes care of all caption and reference numbering is a great time saver Chapter 11 Formatting The term formatting is rather broad but in this case it needs to be as this section will guide you through the various text paragraph and page formatting techniques Formatting tends to refer to most things to do
332. yping a special character when you didn t mean to This disappears after a few days as you get used to them Too many s Too many s 1 6 date December 2004 The reason LaTeX thinks there are too many s here is that the opening curly brace is missing after the date control sequence and before the word December so EXAMPLES 37 the closing curly brace is seen as one too many which it is In fact there are other things which can follow the date command apart from a date in curly braces so LaTeX cannot possibly guess that you ve missed out the opening curly brace until it finds a closing one Undefined control sequence Undefined control sequence 1 6 dtae December 2004 In this example LaTeX is complaining that it has no such command control sequence as dtae Obviously it s been mistyped but only a human can detect that fact all LaTeX knows is that dtae is not a command it knows about it s undefined Mistypings are the most common source of errors If your editor has drop down menus to insert common commands and environments use them Runaway argument Runaway argument December 2004 maketitle Paragraph ended before date was complete lt to be read again gt par 1 8 In this error the closing curly brace has been omitted from the date It s the opposite of the error of too many s and it results in maketitle trying to format the title page while LaTeX is still expectin
333. ystems Xfig can only be installed using Cygwin X how ever this will require a fast internet connection and about 2 gigabytes of space on you computer With Cygwin to run Xfig you need to first start the Start X Server then launch xterm to bring up a terminal In this terminal type xfig without the double quotes of course and press return Inkscape Inkscape is an open source vector graphics editor which can export images to EPS files which may then be imported into LaTeX see Importing Graphics It can run natively under Windows Linux or Mac OS An extremely useful plug in is textext which can import LaTeX objects This can be used for inserting mathematical notation or LaTeX fonts into graphics which may then be imported into LaTeX documents See also e Installing Extra Packages 284 APPENDIX A INSTALLATION Appendix B Useful Measurement Macros A list of macros and their values Units First we introduce the LaTeX measurement units You can choose from a variety of units pt a point is 1 72 27 inch that means about 0 0138 inch or 0 3515 mm bp a big point is 1 72 inch that means about 0 0139 inch or 0 3527 mm mm a millimeter cm a centimeter in inch ex roughly the height of an x in the current font em roughly the width of an M note the uppercase of the current font Length macros Some length commands are baselineskip The

LaTeX - Mathematical & Computer Sciences

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LaTeX - Mathematical &amp; Computer Sciences

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LaTeX - Mathematical & Computer Sciences